View S7300_1918042.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

preface, contents general technical specifications 1 power supply modules 2 digital modules 3 analog modules 4 other signal modules 5 interface modules 6 rs 485 repeater 7 simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8 appendices parameter sets for signal modules a diagnostics data of the signal modules b dimension drawings c spare parts and accessories for s7-300 modules d guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) e list of abbreviations f glossary, index edition 10/2001 a5e00105505-01 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications reference manual this manual is part of the following documentation packages with the order numbers: s7?300 programmable controller: 6es7398-8fa10-8ba0 et 200m distributed i/o device: 6es7153-1aa00-8ba0 simatic
chapter ! danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. ! warning indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. ! caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. qualified personnel only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. correct usage note the following: ! warning this device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by siemens. this product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. trademarks simatic some of other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner ? s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. safety guidelines this manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. these notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: we have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. however, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. suggestions for improvement are welcomed. disclaim of liability copyright siemens ag 1998-2001 all rights reserved the reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. offenders will be liable for damages. all rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. siemens ag bereich automatisierungs- und antriebstechnik geschaeftsgebiet industrie-automatisierungssysteme postfach 4848, d- 90327 nuernberg ?
iii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 preface purpose of the manual the information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator actions, function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the s7-300. how to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an s7-300, m7-300 or et 200m system is described in the installation manuals for each system. required experience to understand the manual, you should have general experience of automation engineering. audience this reference manual describes the modules of the s7-300 which are used in the s7-300, m7-300 and et 200m systems. it includes data sheets for the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the s7-300. scope of the manual the present documentation package contains the descriptions for all modules available at the time of publication. we reserve the right to separately include current product information on new modules and new releases of existing modules.
preface iv s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 changes compared with the previous version compared to the previous version, of the ?module data? reference manual, the following chapters and appendices have been thoroughly revised and new modules added, as necessary: chapter 3 ?digital modules?, chapter 4 ?analog modules? chapter 5 ?other signal modules? chapter 8 ?simatic top connect und simatic top connect tpa? appendix a ?parameter sets for signal modules?, appendix b ?diagnostic data of signal modules?, list of abbreviations and glossary note: the previous version of this ?module data? reference manual can be recognized by the number in the footer: ewa 4neb 710 6067-0x-02. the current number is: a5e00105505-01. standards and approvals the s7-300 meets the requirements and criteria of iec 61131, part 2. the s7-300 satisfies the requirements of the ce mark. the approbations for csa, ul and fm are available for the s7-300. details on the approbations and standards are given in section 1.1.
preface v s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 how the manual fits in s7-300, m7-300 reference manual ?cpu specifications? ? cpu specifications cpu 312 ifm to 318-2 dp ? ? cpu specifications cpu 312c to 314c-2 ptp/dp ? description of the operation, functions and technical cpu specifications. manual ?technological functions? manual examples description of the individual technological functions: ? positioning ? counting ? ptp connection ? controlling the cd contains examples for the technological functions. installation manual manual description of the configuration, assembly, wiring, networking and commissioning of an s7-300. reference manual ?module specifications? you are reading this manual reference manual function description and technical specifications of the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules. instruction list ? cpus 312 ifm, 314 ifm, 313, 315, 315-2 dp, 316-2 dp, 318-2 dp ? ? cpus 312 c to 314 c-2 ptp/dp ? list of instructions for the cpus and their execution times. list of blocks that can be executed (obs/sfcs/sfbs) and their execution times. getting started ? cpu 31xc: positioning with analog output ? ? cpu 31xc: positioning with digital output ? ? cpu 31xc: counting ? ? cpu 31xc: ptp connection ? ? cpu 31xc: controlling ? ? cpu 31xc ? ? s7-300 ? a getting started leads you through an example from the first steps in commissioning to a functioning program.
preface vi s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 et 200m manual ? et 200m distributed i/o device ? manual description of the mechanical and electrical configuration, installation and wiring. reference manual ? signal modules for process automation ? reference manual description of the overview of usage in process automation, the parameter assignment with simatic pdm, the digital input and output modules. reference manual ? module specifications ? you are reading this manual reference manual function description and technical specifications of the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules. navigation to help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following access aids: at the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual. an overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on each page of each chapter. you will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. the glossary contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual. at the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you fast access to the information you need.
preface vii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 attributes of technical specifications several values of the technical data are specified with attributes in the module data sheets. these attributes for the values in the technical data mean: attribute meaning minimum/maximum a minimum/maximum value represents a limit or operating value guaranteed by siemens. the minimum or maximum of this value must not be exceeded within other operating limit values during operation. as a user, you must stay within the limits of this value. typical the typical value becomes settled under rated conditions and at an ambient temperature of 25 c. values may fall below or exceed the typical value due to component tolerances. approx. the ? approx. ? value denotes a rounded value, for example the weight of a module. without attributes values without attributes are rated values with no tolerances. further support please contact your local siemens representative if you have any queries about the products described in this manual. http://www.ad.siemens.de/partner training center ssiemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with the simatic s7 automation system. please contact your regional training center or our central training center in d 90327 nuremberg, germany for details: telefon: +49 (911) 895-3200. http://www.sitrain.com simatic documentation on the internet you will find the documentation on the internet at: http://www.ad.siemens.de/support use the knowledge manager to find the documentation you need quickly. if you have any questions or suggestions concerning the documentation you can use the ? documentation ? conference in the internet forum.
preface viii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 automation and drives, service & support contact at any time of the day throughout the world: johnson city nuremberg singapore simatic hotline worldwide (nuremberg) technical support (freecontact) local time: mon. ? fri. 7 am to 5 pm phone: +49 (180) 5050-222 fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 e-mail: techsupport@ ad.siemens.de gmt: +1:00 worldwide (nuremberg) technical support (subject to charge, with simatic card only) local time: mon. ? fri. 0 am to 12 pm phone: +49 (911) 895-7777 fax: +49 (911) 895-7001 gmt: +01:00 europe / africa (nuremberg) authorization local time: mon. ? fri. 7 am to 5 pm phone: +49 (911) 895-7200 fax: +49 (911) 895-7201 e-mail: authorization@ nbgm.siemens.de gmt: +1:00 america (johnson city) technical support and authorization local time: mon. ? fri. 8 am to 7 pm phone: +1 423 461-2522 fax: +1 423 461-2289 e-mail: simatic.hotline@ sea.siemens.com gmt: ? 5:00 asia and australia (singapore) technical support and authorization local time: mon. ? fri. 8.30 am to 5.30 pm phone: +65 740-7000 fax: +65 740-7001 e-mail: simatic.hotline@ sae.siemens.com.sg gmt: +8:00 the languages spoken on the simatic hotlines are normally english and german; on the authorization hotline, french, italian and spanish are also spoken.
preface ix s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 service & support on the internet in addition to our documentation, we offer our know-how online on the internet at: http://www.ad.siemens.de/support where you will find the following: current product information leaflets, faqs (frequently asked questions), downloads, tips and tricks. a newsletter giving you the most up-to-date information on our products. the knowledge manager helps you find the documents you need. users and specialists from all over the world share information in the forum. your local customer service representative for automation & drives in our customer service representative data bank. information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under ? services ? .
preface x s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01
xi s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 contents preface iii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 general technical specifications 1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 standards and approvals 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 electromagnetic compatibility 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for operating s7-300s 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 rated voltages of the s7-300 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 simatic outdoor modules 1-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for operating simatic outdoor modules 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 power supply modules 2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 power supply module ps 305; 2 a; (6es7 305-1ba80-0aa0) 2-2 . . . . . . . . . 2.2 power supply module ps 307; 2 a; (6es7 307-1ba00-0aa0) 2-6 . . . . . . . . . 2.3 power supply module ps 307; 5 a; (6es7 307-1eax0-0aa0) 2-10 . . . . . . . . . 2.4 power supply module ps 307; 10 a; (6es7 307-1ka00-0aa0) 2-15 . . . . . . . . 3 digital modules 3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 module overview 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 digital module parameter assignment 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 diagnostics of the digital modules 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 digital input module sm 321; di 32
contents xii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.7.3 interrupts of the sm 321; di 16
contents xiii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4 analog modules 4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 module overview 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the module 4-7 . . . . . . 4.3 analog value representation 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 analog value representation for analog input channels 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 analog value representation for analog output channels 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 setting the measuring method and measuring ranges of analog input channels 4-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 behavior of the analog modules 4-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 effect of supply voltage and operating mode 4-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 effect of range of values of the analog values 4-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 effect of operational limit and basic error limit 4-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 conversion, cycle, setting and response time of analog modules 4-34 . . . . 4.7 analog module parameter assignment 4-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 parameters of the analog input modules 4-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 parameters of the analog output modules 4-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 parameters of the analog input/output modules 4-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 connecting sensors to analog inputs 4-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 connecting voltage sensors 4-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 connecting current sensors 4-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 connecting resistance thermometers and resistors 4-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 connecting thermocouples 4-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 connecting loads/actuators to analog output 4-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 connecting loads and actuators to voltage outputs 4-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15 connecting loads and actuators to current outputs 4-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16 diagnostics of the analog modules 4-68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17 interrupts of the analog modules 4-71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18 analog input module sm 331; ai 8
contents xiv s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.21 analog input module sm 331; ai 8
contents xv s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 6 interface modules 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 module overview 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 interface module im 360; (6es7 360-3aa01-0aa0) 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 interface module im 361; (6es7 361 3ca01-0aa0) 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 interface module im 365; (6es7 365-0ba01-0aa0) 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 rs 485 repeater 7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 application and characteristics; (6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0) 7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 appearance of the rs 485 repeater; (6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0) 7-3 . . . . . . . 7.3 rs 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation 7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 technical specifications 7-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 module overview 8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 wiring components 8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 cut the connecting cable to length and terminate 8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 wiring the front connector module 8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 connecting the connecting cable to the terminal block 8-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 wiring actuators/sensors to the terminal block 8-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 wiring simatic top connect with digital modules 8-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 simatic top connect components and selection aid 8-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2 wiring the module with terminal block for one-conductor connection 8-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3 wiring the module with terminal block for three-conductor connection 8-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.4 wiring the module with terminal block for 2a modules 8-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 wiring simatic top connect tpa with analog modules 8-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 simatic top connect tpa components and selection aid 8-20 . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 simatic top connect tpa terminal assignment and terminal allocation 8-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 connecting the signal-line shield 8-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.4 connection example 8-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a parameter sets for signal modules a-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a.1 how to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program a-1 . a.2 parameters of the digital input modules a-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a.3 parameters of the digital output modules a-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a.4 parameters of the analog input modules a-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a.5 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8
contents xvi s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 b diagnostics data of signal modules b-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b.1 evaluating diagnostic data of the signal modules in the user program b-1 . b.2 structure and content of diagnostic data bytes 0 to 7 b-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b.3 channel-specific diagnostic data from byte 8 b-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b.4 diagnostic data of the sm 338; pos-input b-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c dimension drawings c-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c.1 dimension drawings of the rails c-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c.2 dimension drawings of the power supply modules c-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c.3 dimension drawings of the interface modules c-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c.4 dimension drawings of the signal modules c-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c.5 dimension drawings for accessories c-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d spare parts and accessories for s7-300 modules d-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) e-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . e.1 what is esd? e-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e.2 electrostatic charging of persons e-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e.3 general protective measures against electrostatic discharge damage e-4 . f list of abbreviations f-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . glossary glossary-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . index index-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xvii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 figures 2-1 wiring schematic of the ps 305 power supply module (2 a) 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 basic circuit diagram of the ps 305 power supply module (2 a) 2-5 . . . . . . 2-3 wiring schematic of the ps 307 power supply module (2 a) 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307 power supply module (2 a) 2-7 . . . . . . 2-5 wiring schematic of the ps 307 power supply module (5 a) 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307 power supply module (5 a) 2-12 . . . . . . 2-7 wiring schematic of the ps 307 power supply module (10 a) 2-15 . . . . . . . . . 2-8 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307 power supply module (10 a) 2-16 . . . . . 3-1 module view and block diagram of the digital input module sm 321; di 32
contents xviii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3-27 special characteristic for operation with a safe electrical extra-low voltage 3-80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 module view and block diagram of the sm 323; di 16/do 16
contents xix s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4-34 module view and block diagram of the analog output module sm 332; ao 4
contents xx s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 b-4 diagnostic byte for a digital input channel of the sm 321; di 16 ? insert and remove ? function with active bus module, s7-300 module and explosion-proof partition c-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-11 dimension drawing of the active bus modules c-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-12 power supply module ps 307; 2 a c-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-13 power supply module ps 307; 5 a c-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-14 power supply module ps 307; 10 a c-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-15 dimension drawing of the power supply module ps 307; 5 a with cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp. front view c-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-16 dimension drawing of the power supply module ps 307; 5 a with cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp. side view c-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-17 interface module im 360 c-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-18 interface module im 361 c-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-19 interface module im 365 c-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-20 signal module c-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-21 2 signal modules with shield connecting element c-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-22 simatic top connect, 3-tier c-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-23 simatic top connect, 2-tier c-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-24 simatic top connect, 1-tier c-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-25 rs 485 repeater on standard rail c-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-26 rs 485 repeater on s7-300 rail c-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e-1 electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person e-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tables 1-1 use in an industrial environment 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 pulse-shaped interference 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 sinusoidal interference 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 shipping and storage conditions for modules 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 mechanical conditions 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 ambient mechanical conditions test 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 climatic conditions 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xxi s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1-8 test voltages 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 rated voltages 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 ? simatic outdoor modules ? 1-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 outdoor modules ambient mechanical conditions test 1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 outdoor modules climatic conditions 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 reaction of the ps 305 power supply module (2 a) to atypical operating conditions 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 reaction of the ps 307 power supply module (2 a) to atypical operating conditions 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 reaction of the ps 307 power supply module (5 a) to atypical operating conditions 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 reaction of the ps 307 power supply module (10 a) to atypical operating conditions 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 digital input modules: characteristics at a glance 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 digital output modules: characteristics at a glance 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 relay output modules: characteristics at a glance 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 digital input/output modules: characteristics at a glance 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 parameters of the sm 321; di 16
contents xxii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4-11 analog value representation in voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 v and 0 to 10 v 4-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 analog value representation in current measuring ranges + 20 ma to + 3.2 ma 4-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 analog value representation in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 ma and 4 to 20 ma 4-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 analog value representation for resistance-type transmitters 10 kw and from 150 to 600 w 4-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors pt 100, 200, 500,1000 4-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors pt 100. 200, 500,1000 4-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 4-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 4-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors cu 10 4-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors cu 10 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type b 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type e 4-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type j 4-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type k 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type l 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type n 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type r, s 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type t 4-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type u 4-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 bipolar output ranges 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 unipolar output ranges 4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 analog value representation in output range + 10 v 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 analog value representation in output ranges 0 to 10 v and 1 to 5 v 4-25 . 4-34 analog value representation in output range + 20 ma 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 analog value representation in output ranges 0 and 20 ma and 4 to 20 ma 4-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 dependencies of the analog input/output values on the operating state of the cpu and the supply voltage l+ 4-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 behavior of the analog input modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the range of values 4-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 behavior of the analog output modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the range of values 4-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 parameters of the analog input modules 4-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xxiii s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4-40 parameters of the analog output modules 4-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 x 12 bit: parameters 4-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 options for compensation of the reference junction temperature 4-56 . . . . . 4-43 ordering data of the comparison point 4-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 diagnostic messages of the analog input modules 4-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 diagnostics messages of the analog output modules 4-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 diagnostics messages of the analog input modules, causes of errors and remedial measures 4-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 diagnostics messages of the analog output modules, causes of errors and remedial measures 4-71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 default settings of the sm 331; ai 8 ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode 4-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode 4-124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8
contents xxiv s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5-7 diagnostic messages of the sm 338, causes of errors and troubleshooting 5-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 interface modules: characteristics at a glance 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 maximum cable length of a segment 7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 maximum cable length between two rs 485 repeaters 7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 description and functions of the rs 485 repeater 7-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 simatic top connect/... tpa: connectable modules 8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 sequence of steps for wiring simatic top connect/... tpa 8-4 . . . . . . . . . 8-3 wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage 8-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital modules 8-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 components of simatic top connect 8-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 selection table for simatic top connect components 8-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 connection notes for simatic top connect with one-conductor connection 8-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 terminal assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection 8-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 connection notes for simatic top connect with three-conductor connection 8-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 terminal assignments of the terminal block for three-conductor connection 8-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 connection notes for simatic top connect with 2a module connection 8-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 terminal assignments of the terminal block for 2a modules 8-18 . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 components for simatic top connect tpa 8-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 terminal assignment of the terminal block of simatic top connect tpa 8-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a-1 sfcs for assigning parameters to signal modules a-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a-2 parameters of the digital input modules a-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a-3 parameters of the digital output modules a-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a-4 parameters of the analog input modules a-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a-5 codes for interference suppression of the analog input modules a-9 . . . . . . a-6 codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input modules a-9 . . . . . . . . a-7 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8
1-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 general technical specifications what are general technical specifications? general technical specifications include the following:
general technical specifications 1-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1.1 standards and approvals iec 61131 the s7-300 programmable logic controller satisfies the requirements and criteria of standard iec 61131 part 2. ce mark our products satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the ec directives listed below and comply with the harmonized european standards (en) promulgated in the official journals of the european community for programmable logic controllers: ? electromagnetic compatibility ? (emc directive) ? electrical equipment designed for use between certain voltage limits ? (low-voltage directive) the declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below: siemens aktiengesellschaft bereich automatisierungstechnik a&d as e 42 postfach 1963 d-92209 amberg mark for australia our products satisfy the requirements of standard as/nzs 2064 (class a). use in industrial environment simatic products have been designed for use in industrial environments. table 1-1 use in an industrial environment emc directive requirements in respect of: emitted interference immunity industry en 50081-2 : 1993 en 50082-2 : 1995
general technical specifications 1-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 use in residential areas if you operate an s7-300 in a residential area, you must ensure limit value class b in accordance with en 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions. measures to achieve interference suppression according to limit value class b: ! warning personal injury or property damage can result. in areas subject to danger of explosion, personal injury or property damage can result if you withdraw connectors while an s7-300 is in operation. always isolate the s7-300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before withdrawing connectors.
general technical specifications 1-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1.2 electromagnetic compatibility introduction in this section you will find details of the noise immunity of s7-300 modules and details of radio interference suppression. the s7-300 modules satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the law applicable to emc on the european domestic market. definition of ? emc ? electromagnetic compatibility (emc) is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment. pulse-shaped interference the following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules compared to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. a requirement for this is that the s7-300 system complies with the specifications and directives on electric design. table 1-2 pulse-shaped interference pulse-shaped interference tested with satisfies degree of severity electrostatic discharge according to iec 61000-4-2 8 kv 4 kv 3 (discharge in air) 2 (contact dis- charge) bursts (fast transient bursts) to iec 61000-4-4 2 kv (supply cable) 2 kv (signal cable) 3 energy-rich single impulse (surge) according to iec 61000-4-5 external protective circuitry required (refer to the manual s7-300 programmable controller, hardware and installation , chapter ? lightning protection and overvoltage protection ? )
general technical specifications 1-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 sinusoidal interference the table below shows the emc behavior of the s7-300 modules with regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables. table 1-3 sinusoidal interference sinusoidal interference test values satisfies degree of severity hf irradiation (electromagnetic fields) according to iec 61000-4-3 according to iec 61000-4-3 10 v/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 khz over the range from 80 mhz to 1000 mhz 10 v/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 mhz 3 hf conductance on cables and cable shields according to iec 61000-4-6 test voltage 10 v with 80% amplitude modula- tion of 1 khz over the range from 9 mhz to 80 mhz 3 emission of radio interference interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with en 55011: limit value class a, group 1. from 30 to 230 mhz < 40 db (
general technical specifications 1-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1.3 shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries shipping and storage of modules s7-300 modules surpass the requirements of iec 61131, part 2, in respect of shipping and storage requirements. the following details apply to modules shipped and/or stored in their original packing. table 1-4 shipping and storage conditions for modules condition permitted range free fall (in shipping packing) ? 40 ? 1000 to 3500 m) relative humidity 10 to 95 %, no condensation sinusoidal oscillations to iec 60068-2-6 5 ? 9 hz: 3.5 mm 9 ? 150 hz: 9.8 m/s 2 shock according to iec 60068-2-29 250 m/s 2 , 6 ms, 1000 shocks transporting backup batteries wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. special approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for s7-300 systems. the lithium content of the backup battery is approximately 0.25 g. storing backup batteries backup batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. the maximum shelf life is 5 years. ! warning improper handling of backup batteries can result in injury and damage to property. if backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe burning. observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the s7-300 programmable logic controller:
general technical specifications 1-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1.4 mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for operating s7-300s operating conditions s7-300 systems are intended for stationary use in locations protected against the weather. the operating conditions surpass the requirements of iec 61131, part 2. the s7-300 satisfies the operating conditions of classes 3m3 and 3c3 to din en 60721, part 2. use with additional measures the s7-300, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures: ? dust accumulation ? corrosive vapors or gases ? strong electric or magnetic fields ? elevators ? electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas an additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the s7-300 in a cabinet or in a housing. ambient mechanical conditions the ambient mechanical conditions for s7-300 modules are listed in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations. table 1-5 mechanical conditions frequency range in hz continuous occasional 10
general technical specifications 1-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ambient mechanical conditions test the following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests for ambient mechanical conditions. table 1-6 ambient mechanical conditions test test ... test standard remarks vibrations vibration test accor- ding to iec 60068 part 2-6 (sinusoidal) type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 10 hz ? di- rection in each of three axes perpendicular to each other climatic conditions you can use s7-300s under the following climatic conditions: table 1-7 climatic conditions climatic conditions permitted range remarks temperature: horizontal installation: vertical installation: 0 to 60 ? relative humidity 10 to 95 % non-condensing, corres- ponds to relative humi- dity (rh) class 2 accor- ding to iec 61131, part 2 atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hpa corresponding to an alti- tude of ? 1000 to 2000 m concentration of contami- nants so 2 : < 0.5 ppm; rh < 60 %, non-condensing h 2 s: < 0.1 ppm; rh < 60 %, non-condensing test: 10 ppm; 4 days test: 1 ppm; 4 days
general technical specifications 1-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1.5 information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection test voltages dielectric strength was demonstrated in the routine test with the following test voltages: table 1-8 test voltages circuits with rated voltage u e to other circuits or to ground test voltage 0 v < u e ? in other words, protective conductor connection to rail necessary protection against ingress of foreign bodies and water degree of protection ip 20 according to iec 60529, that is, protection against contact with standard probes. there is no special protection against the ingress of water.
general technical specifications 1-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1.6 rated voltages of the s7-300 rated operating voltages the modules of the s7-300 operate with different rated voltages. the following table contains the rated voltages and the corresponding tolerances. table 1-9 rated voltages rated voltage tolerance range 24 vdc 20.4 to 28.8 vdc 120 vac 93 to 132 vac 230 vac 187 to 264 vac
general technical specifications 1-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 1.7 simatic outdoor modules definition simatic outdoor modules are modules that can be used under extended environmental conditions. extended environmental conditions mean: ? 25 ? standard ? modules the functional scope and technical specifications for the simatic outdoor modules correspond to those of the ? standard ? modules. the mechanical and climatic environmental conditions as well as their test method have changed. the simatic outdoor modules have their own order numbers (refer to table 1-10) configuring in step 7 if you have a step 7 version in which the simatic outdoor modules are not contained in the hardware catalog, simply configure your system with the corresponding ? standard ? modules (refer to table 1-10).
general technical specifications 1-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 simatic outdoor modules the following table contains all simatic outdoor modules. the order numbers of the corresponding ? standard ? modules have been included as an aid to configuration. you can refer to the description and technical specifications in the special section on the ? standard ? module. table 1-10 ? simatic outdoor modules ? module simatic outdoor module for use under extended environmental conditions ? standard ? modules as of order no. im 153-1 6es7 153-1aa 82 -0xb0 6es7 153-1aa02-0xb0 cpu 315-2 dp cpu 312 ifm cpu 314 cpu 314 ifm 6es7 315-2af 82 -0ab0 6es7 312-5ac 81 -0ab0 6es7 314-1ae 83 -0ab0 6es7 314-5ae 83 -0ab0 6es7 315-2af02-0ab0 6es7 312-5ac01-0ab0 6es7 314-1ae03-0ab0 6es7 314-5ae03-0ab0 im 365 6es7 365-0ba 81 -0aa0 6es7 365-0ba01-0aa0 power supply module ps 305 ps 307 6es7 305-1ba 80 -0aa0 6es7 307-1ea 80 -0aa0 --- 6es7 307-1ea00-0aa0 sm 321 digital input module; sm 321; di 16
general technical specifications 1-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 1-10 ? simatic outdoor modules ? , continued module ? standard ? modules simatic outdoor module for use under extended environmental conditions module as of order no. feprom 64 kbyte memory card feprom 32 kbyte memory card feprom 16 kbyte memory card 6es7 951-0kf 80 -0aa0 6es7 951-0ke 80 -0aa0 6es7 951-0kd 80 -0aa0 6es7 951-0kf00-0aa0 6es7 951-0ke00-0aa0 6es7 951-0kd00-0aa0 bus connector 6es7 972-0bax0-0xa0 6es7 972-0bbx0-0xa0 1.8 mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for operating simatic outdoor modules ambient mechanical conditions operating category: according to iec 721 3-3, class 3m4. ambient mechanical conditions test the following table provides information about the type and extent of tests for mechanical ambient conditions on simatic outdoor modules. table 1-11 outdoor modules ambient mechanical conditions test test ... test standard remarks vibrations vibration test according to iec 6008 part 2-6 (sinusoidal) type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 5 hz f 9 hz, constant amplitude of 3.5 mm 9 hz f 150 hz, constant acceleration of 1 g ocillation period: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each other shock shock test according to iec 6008 part 2-27 type of shock: half-sine severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/ ? direction in each of three axes perpendicular to each other
general technical specifications 1-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 climatic conditions the simatic outdoor modules can be used under the following climatic ambient conditions: operating category: according to iec 721 3-3, class 3k5. table 1-12 outdoor modules climatic conditions ambient condition permitted range remarks temperature: horizontal installation vertical installation ? 25 ? 25 ? relative humidity from 5 to 95 % occasional, brief condensation , corresponds to relative humidity (rh) class 2 according to iec 61131, part 2 atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hpa corresponds to a height of ? 1000 to 2000 m pollutant concentration (according to iec 721 3-3; class 3c3) so 2 : < 0.5 ppm; relative humidity < 60% h 2 s: < 0.1 ppm; relative humidity < 60% test: 10 ppm; 4 days 1 ppm; 4 days
2-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 power supply modules introduction various power supply modules are available to supply your s7-300 programmable controller and the sensors/actuators with 24 vdc. power supply modules this chapter describes the technical specifications of the power supply modules of the s7-300 programmable controller. in addition to the technical specifications, this chapter describes the following:
power supply modules 2-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 2.1 power supply module ps 305; 2 a; (6es7 305-1ba80-0aa0) order number ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 305-1ba80-0aa0 characteristics the ps 305 power supply module (2 a) has the following salient features:
power supply modules 2-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 wiring schematic of the ps 305; 2 a strain-relief assembly terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor terminals for 24 vdc output voltage led for ? 24 vdc output voltage available ? on/off switch for 24 vdc 24 vdc l+1 m1 l+2 l+2 l+2 m2 m2 m2 i figure 2-1 wiring schematic of the ps 305 power supply module (2 a)
power supply modules 2-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the ps 305; 2 a (6es7 305-1ba80-0aa0) dimensions and w eight dimensions w
power supply modules 2-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 basic circuit diagram of the ps 305; 2 a l+2 m2 l+1 m1 24 vdc i/ u figure 2-2 basic circuit diagram of the ps 305 power supply module (2 a) line protection we recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (mcb) (for example siemens 5sn1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the ps 305 power supply module (2 a):
power supply modules 2-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 2.2 power supply module ps 307; 2 a; (6es7 307-1ba00-0aa0) order number 6es7 307-1ba00-0aa0 characteristics the ps 307 power supply module (2 a) has the following salient features:
power supply modules 2-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 wiring schematic of the ps 307; 2 a strain-relief assembly 230v terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor terminals for 24 vdc output voltage voltage selector on/off switch for 24 vdc 24 vdc l1 n l+ m m led for ? 24 vdc output voltage available ? l+ i figure 2-3 wiring schematic of the ps 307 power supply module (2 a) basic circuit diagram of the ps 307; 2 a l+ m l1 n 24 vdc i/ u figure 2-4 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307 power supply module (2 a)
power supply modules 2-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 line protection we recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (mcb) (for example siemens 5sn1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the ps 307 power supply module (2 a): ? there is an undervoltage on the pri- mary side automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery dark
power supply modules 2-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the ps 307; 2 a (6es7 307-1ba00-0aa0) dimensions and w eight dimensions w
power supply modules 2-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 2.3 power supply module ps 307; 5 a; (6es7 307-1eax0-0aa0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 307-1ea00-0aa0 order number ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 307-1ea80-0aa0 characteristics the ps 307 power supply module (5 a) has the following salient features:
power supply modules 2-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 wiring schematic of the ps 307; 5 a strain-relief assembly terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor terminals for 24 vdc output voltage led for ? 24 vdc output voltage available ? voltage selector on/off switch for 24 vdc 230v 24 vdc l1 n l+ l+ l+ m m m i figure 2-5 wiring schematic of the ps 307 power supply module (5 a)
power supply modules 2-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307; 5 a l+ m l1 n 24 vdc u i/ figure 2-6 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307 power supply module (5 a) line protection we recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (mcb) (for example siemens 5sn1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the ps 307 power supply module (5 a): ? there is an undervoltage on the primary side automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery dark
power supply modules 2-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the ps 307; 5 a (6es7 307-1ea00-0aa0) dimensions and w eight dimensions w
power supply modules 2-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the ps 307; 5 a ( 6es7 307-1ea80-0aa0) dimensions and w eight dimensions w
power supply modules 2-15 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 2.4 power supply module ps 307; 10 a; (6es7 307-1ka00-0aa0) order number 6es7 307-1ka00-0aa0 characteristics the ps 307 power supply module (10 a) has the following salient features: ? 24 vdc output voltage available ? voltage selector on/off switch for 24 vdc 230v 24 vdc l+ m l+ m l+ m l+ m strain-relief assembly l1 n i figure 2-7 wiring schematic of the ps 307 power supply module (10 a)
power supply modules 2-16 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307; 10 a l+ m l1 n 24 vdc u i/ figure 2-8 basic circuit diagram of the ps 307 power supply module (10 a) line protection we recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (mcb) (for example, siemens 5sn1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the ps 307 power supply module (10 a): ? there is an undervoltage on the pri- mary side automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery dark
power supply modules 2-17 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the ps 307; 10 a (6es7 307-1ka00-0aa0) dimensions and w eight dimensions w
power supply modules 2-18 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01
3-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 digital modules changes and improvements since the previous version of the reference manual this chapter describes all new digital modules. furthermore, two new overview sections will make it easier for you to access the information: ? module overview ? section shows you the modules that are available, together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find the module suitable for your task. ? sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the module ? provides the answer to the question ? what must i do in succession to commission the module quickly and successfully? structure of the chapter the present chapter is broken down into the following subjects: 1. overview containing the modules that are available here and a description 2. information that is generally valid ? in other words, relating to all digital modules (for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics) 3. information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special characteristics of the module): a) for digital input modules b) for digital output modules c) for digital input/output modules additional information appendix a describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and 128) in the system data. you must be familiar with this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the step 7 user program. appendix b describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. you must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the step 7 user program. 3
digital modules 3-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 in this chapter section contents page 3.1 module overview 3-4 3.2 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module 3-7 3.3 assigning parameters to digital modules 3-8 3.4 diagnostics of digital modules 3-9 3.5 digital input module sm 321; di 32 24 vdc; (6es7 321-1blx0-0aa0) 3-10 3.6 digital input module sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; (6es7 321-1bhx2-0aa0) 3-13 3.7 digital input module sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts; (6es7 321-7bhx0-0ab0) 3-16 3.8 digital input module sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; source input; (6es7 321-1bh50-0aa0) 3-26 3.9 digital input module sm 321; di 16 48-125 vdc; (6es7 321-1ch80-0aa0) 3-28 3.10 digital input module sm 321; di 16 1 20 vac; (6es7 321-1eh01-0aa0) 3-30 3.11 digital input module sm 321; di 8 1 20/230 vac; (6es7 321-1ffx1-0aa0) 3-32 3.12 digital input module sm 321; di 32 120 vac; (6es7 321-1el00-0aa0) 3-35 3.13 digital output module sm 322; do 32 24 vdc/2 a; (6es7 322-1bf01-0aa0) 3-43 3.16 digital output module sm 322; do 8 120/230 vac/2 a; (6es7 322-1ffx1-0aa0) 3-61 3.20 digital output module sm 322; do 32 120 vac/1,0 a; (6es7 322-1el00-0aa0) 3-64 3.21 relay output module sm 322; do 16 rel. 120 vac; (6es7 322-1hh00-0aa0) 3-68 3.22 relay output module sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac; (6es7 322-1hf01-0aa0) 3-71
digital modules 3-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 section page contents 3.23 relay output module sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac/5 a; (6es7 322-1hf10/-1hf80-0aa0) 3-74 3.24 relay output module sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac/5 a; (6es7 322-1hf20-0aa0) 3-78 3.25 digital input/output module sm 323; di 16/do16 24 vdc/0.5 a; (6es7 323-1bl00-0aa0) 3-82 3.26 digital input/output module sm 323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a; (6es7 323-1bhx1-0aa0) 3-86
digital modules 3-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.1 module overview introduction the following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital modules. this overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. table 3-1 digital input modules: characteristics at a glance module characteristics sm 321; di 32 24 vdc (-1bh02-) sm 321; di 16 24 vdc (-7bhx0-) sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; source input (-1bh50-) sm 321; di 16 48-125 vdc (-1ch80-) sm 321; di 16 120 vac (-1eh01-) sm 321; di 8 120 /230 vac (-1ffx1-) sm 321; di 32 120 vac (-1el00-) number of inputs 32 di; isolated in groups of 16 16 di; isolated in groups of 16 16 di; isolated in groups of 16 16 di; source in- put, iso- lated in groups of 16 16 di; iso- lated in groups of 8 16 di; isolated in groups of 4 8 di, iso- lated in groups of 2 32 di; isolated in groups of 8 rated input volt- age 24 vdc 24 vdc 24 vdc 24 vdc 48 to 125 vdc 120 vac 120/ 230 vac 120 vac suitable for... switches; two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (beros) switches; two and three-wire ac proximity switches programmable diagnostics no no yes no no no no no diagnostic inter- rupt no no yes no no no no no hardware interrupt upon edge change no no yes no no no no no adjustable input delays no no yes no no no no no special features ? ? 2 short- circuit- proof sen- sor sup- plies for 8 chan- nels each external redundant power supply possible to supply sensors ? ? ? ? ?
digital modules 3-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 3-2 digital output modules: characteristics at a glance module characteristics sm 322; do32 ? fuse blown indicator. replaceable fuse for each group blown fuse indi- cator for each group
digital modules 3-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 3-3 relay output modules: characteristics at a glance module characteristics sm 322; do 16 ? table 3-4 digital input/output modules: characteristics at a glance module character- istics sm 323; di 16/do 16 ?
digital modules 3-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.2 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module introduction the following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission digital modules successfully. the sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times. sequence of steps table 3-5 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module step procedure refer to... 1. select the module section 3.1 and specific module section from section 3.5 2. install the module in the simatic s7 network ? installation ? section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used: ? commissioning ? section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used:
digital modules 3-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.3 digital module parameter assignment introduction digital modules can have different characteristics. you can set the characteristics of dome modules by means of parameter assignment. the information contained in this section refers only to the programmable digital modules: 24 vdc; (6es7 321-7bhx0-0ab0) step 7 . you must perform parameter assignment in stop mode of the cpu. when you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the cpu. on a transition from stop to run mode, the cpu then transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules. static and dynamic parameters the parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. set the static parameters in stop mode of the cpu, as described above. in addition, you can modify the dynamic parameters within the current user program of an s7 control by means of sfcs. note, however, that after a change from run step 7 apply again. you will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in appendix a. parameter settable with cpu operating state static pg (step7 hwconfig) stop dynamic pg (step7 hwconfig) stop sfc 55 in the user program run parameters of the digital modules you will find the parameters of the digital input or output module that you can set in the specific section for the module (section 3.7 on page 3-16 or section 3.16 on page 3-46).
digital modules 3-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.4 diagnostics of the digital modules introduction the information contained in this section refers only to the digital modules with diagnostics capability. for the s7-300, these modules are as follows: 24 vdc; (6es7 321-7bhx0-0ab0) ? diagnostics ? parameter field in step 7 . non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled. actions following diagnostic message in step 7 each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: ? enable diagnostic interrupt ? in step 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and ob 82 is called. reading out diagnostic messages you can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of sfcs in the user program (refer to the appendix ? diagnostic data of signal modules ? ). you can view the cause of the error in step 7 , in the module diagnosis (refer to online help for step 7 ). diagnostic message by means of sf led the digital modules with diagnostics capability indicate errors for you by means of their sf led (group error led). the sf led lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the digital module. it goes out when all errors have been rectified. the group fault (sf) led also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the cpu (if power is on).
digital modules 3-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostic messages interrupt processing by the digital modules you will find the diagnostic messages of the digital input module and output module with their possible causes and remedial action, together with a description of possible interrupts in the specific section on the module (section 3.7 on page 3-16 or section 3.16 on page 3-46). 3.5 digital input module sm 321; di 32 24 vdc; (6es7 321-1blx0-0aa0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 321-1bl00-0aa0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 321-1bl80-0aa0 characteristics the digital input module sm 321; di 32
digital modules 3-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 321; di 32 24 vdc channel number status leds -green backplane bus interface 24v 24v figure 3-1 module view and block diagram of the digital input module sm 321; di 32 24 vdc the following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses. input byte x input byte (x+1) input byte (x+2) input byte (x+3) figure 3-2 terminal assignment of the sm 321; di 32
digital modules 3-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 32 24 vdc dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? 0 ? 24 vdc 13 to 30 v ? 30 to + 5 v input current ? 1 ? typ. 7 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.6 digital input module sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; (6es7 321-1bhx2-0aa0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 321-1bh02-0aa0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 321-1bh82-0aa0 characteristics the digital input module sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc status leds ? green channel number backplane bus interface module m 24 v figure 3-3 module view and block diagram of digital input module sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-15 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? 0 ? 24 vdc 13 to 30 v ? 30 to + 5 v input current ? 1 ? typ. 7 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-16 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.7 digital input module sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts; (6es7 321-7bhx0-0ab0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 321-7bh00-0ab0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 321-7bh80-0ab0 characteristics the sm 321; di 16 ? sensor supply (vs) o.k. ? status leds
digital modules 3-17 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment of the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc status leds ? green channel number backplane bus interface l+ m m 24 v sf v s v s encoder supplies vs - green m m l+ v s v s l + fault indicator - red figure 3-4 module view and block diagram of the sm 321; di 16 ? for example, via another module. vs m l+ 1 l+ 2 l+ to the sensors
digital modules 3-18 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 2.5 v) output current ? 1 ? ? 0 ? 24 vdc 13 to 30 v ? 1 ? typ. 7 ma input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 2 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-19 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.7.1 assigning parameters to the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc parameterization you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in section 3.3. parameters of the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc you will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the sm 321; di 16 step 7 . table 3-6 parameters of the sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-20 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 assigning interrupt parameters to channel groups the table below shows the channels that can be combined to form a channel group if you would like to parameterize interrupt processing. you will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an sfc. table 3-7 assigning the interrupt parameters to the inputs of the sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-21 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.7.2 behavior and diagnostics of the sm 321; di 16 ? l+ exists ? l+ missing ? diagnostics messages of the sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-22 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 note a prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostics messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly in step 7 . behavior upon failure of the supply voltage a failure of the supply voltage of the sm 321; di 16 ? encoder supply missing ? diagnosis). the input value is initially held for 20 to 40 ms before the 0 signal is transferred to the cpu. supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not modify the process value (refer to table 3-9). triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see section 3.7.3). failure of the supply voltage with redundant encoder incoming supply note if an external redundant source is applied simultaneously to the sensor supply (vs), a failure in the internal sensor supply causes a failure of the internal and/or external sensor supply and/or a blown fuse to be indicated instead of a regular sensor supply failure. short-circuit of sensor supply vs irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding vs led goes out if a short-circuit of the encoder supply vs occurs.
digital modules 3-23 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 causes of error and remedial measures table 3-11 diagnostics messages of the sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-24 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.7.3 interrupts of the sm 321; di 16 step 7 , where they are described in greater detail. enabling interrupts the interrupts are not preset ? in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. assign parameters to the interrupt enable in step 7 (refer to section 3.7.1). diagnostic interrupt if you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. the cpu interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostics interrupt block (ob 82). in the user program, you can call sfc 51 or sfc 59 in ob 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. the diagnostic information is consistent until such time as ob 82 is exited. when ob 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
digital modules 3-25 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 hardware interrupt the sm 321; di 16 ? hardware interrupt lost ? is triggered. more interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt buffered on this channel has been executed. interrupt-triggering channels the interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt obs (in the ob start information). the start information is two words long (bits 0 to 31). the bit number is the channel number. bits 16 to 31 are not assigned.
digital modules 3-26 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.8 digital input module sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; source input; (6es7 321-1bh50-0aa0) order number 6es7 321-1bh50-0aa0 characteristics the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc channel number status leds ? green backplane bus interface l + figure 3-6 module view and block diagram of digital input module sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-27 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 16 24 vdc dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? 0 ? 24 vdc ? 13 v to ? 30 v +30 v to ? 5 v input current ? 1 ? typ. 7 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-28 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.9 digital input module sm 321; di 16 48-125 vdc; (6es7 321-1ch80-0aa0) order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 321-1ch80-0aa0 characteristics the sm 321; di 16 48-125 vdc status leds ? green channel number backplane bus interface m 2m 48 to 125 v m 1m 48 to 125 v 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 figure 3-7 module view and block diagram of sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-29 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 16 48-125 vdc dimensions and w eight dimensions w 125 120 weight approx. 200 g data for specific module number of inputs 16 length of cable ? 1 ? 30 v to 146 v ? 0 ? -146 v to 15 v input current ? 1 ? typ. 3.5 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? 0.1 ms to 3.5 ms 0.7 ms to 3.0 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-30 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.10 digital input module sm 321; di 16 120 vac; (6es7 321-1eh01-0aa0) order number 6es7 321-1eh01-0aa0 characteristics the sm 321; di 16 ac 120 v channel number status leds ? green m n n n m m m backplane bus interface n figure 3-8 module view and block diagram of digital input module sm 321; di 16
digital modules 3-31 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 16 120 vac dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? 0 ? ? 1 ? typ. 6 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 25 ms max. 25 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-32 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.11 digital input module sm 321; di 8 120/230 vac; (6es7 321-1ffx1-0aa0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 321-1ff01-0aa0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 321-1ff81-0aa0 characteristics the sm 321; di 8
digital modules 3-33 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 321; di 8 120/230 vac channel number status leds ? green m 1n 2n m m 3n 4n m backplane bus interface figure 3-9 module view and block diagram of the sm 321; di 8
digital modules 3-34 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 8 120/230 vac dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? 0 ? ? 1 ? 120 v, 60 hz 230 v, 50 hz typ. 6.5 ma typ. 11 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 25 ms max. 25 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-35 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.12 digital input module sm 321; di 32
digital modules 3-36 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 321; di 32 125 120 weight approx. 300 g data for specific module number of inputs 32 length of cable ?? 1 ?? signal ?? 0 ?? signal ?? 1 ?? signal typ. 21 ma input delay ?? 0 ?? to ?? 1 ?? ?? 1 ?? to ?? 0 ?? max. 15 ms max. 25 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 2 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-37 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.13 digital output module sm 322; do 32 ? 1 ? signal for approximately 50
digital modules 3-38 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; do 32
digital modules 3-39 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 32 ? 1 ? min. l + ( ? 0.8 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value permitted range 0.5 a 5 ma to 0.6 a ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 0.5 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? max. 100 ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 500 ? 53 v) short-circuit protection of the output
digital modules 3-40 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.14 digital output module sm 322; do 16 ? standard module ? 6es7 322-1bh01-0aa0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 322-1bh81-0aa0 characteristics the digital output module sm 322; do 16 ? 1 ? signal for approximately 50
digital modules 3-41 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 16 ? green figure 3-13 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; do 16 x 24 vdc/0.5 a
digital modules 3-42 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 16 ? 1 ? min. l + ( ? 0.8 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value permitted range 0.5 a 5 ma to 0.6 a ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 0.5 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? max. 100 ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 500 ? 53 v) short-circuit protection of the output
digital modules 3-43 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.15 digital output module sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/2 a; (6es7 322-1bf01-0aa0) order number 6es7 322-1bf01-0aa0 characteristics the digital output module sm 322; do 8 ? 1 ? signal for approximately 50
digital modules 3-44 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/2 a channel number status leds ? green backplane bus interface 1m m 24 v 1 l+ 2m m 24 v 2 l+ figure 3-14 module view and block diagram of digital output module sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-45 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/2 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? min. l + ( ? 0.8 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value permitted range 2 a 5 ma to 2.4 a ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 0.5 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? max. 100 ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 500 ? 48 v) short-circuit protection of the output
digital modules 3-46 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.16 digital output module sm 322; do 8 ? standard module ? 6es7 322-8bf00-0ab0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 322-8bf80-0ab0 characteristics the digital output module sm 322; do ? output without series diode ? output with series diode (for redundant load control)
digital modules 3-47 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 module view of the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-48 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 block diagram of the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-49 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 8 ? 1 ? without series diode with series diode min. l + ( ? 0.8 v) min. l + ( ? 1.6 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value permitted range 0.5 a 10 ma to 0.6 a 1) ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 0.5 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 180 ? 45 v) short-circuit protection of the output yes, electronic
digital modules 3-50 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.16.1 assigning parameters to the sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a parameterization you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in section 3.3. parameters of the sm 322; do 8 step 7 . table 3-12 parameters of the sm 322; do 8 ? 1 ? yes/no no dynamic channel
digital modules 3-51 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.16.2 behavior and diagnostics of the sm 322; do 8 ? l+ exists 0 signal off l+ missing 0 signal behavior upon failure of the supply voltage failure of the supply voltage of the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-52 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostic messages of the sm 322; do 8 step 7 .
digital modules 3-53 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 causes of error and remedial action table 3-15 diagnostic messages of the sm 322; do 8 ? 1 ? open circuit between module and actuator close circuit channel not connected (open) disable the ? diagnose wire break ? parameter for the channel in step 7 no load voltage only with output to ? 1 ? defective output replace module short-circuit to m only with overload of output eliminate overload output to ? 1 ? short-circuit of output to m eliminate short circuit short-circuit to l+ always short-circuit at output to l+ of module supply eliminate short circuit no external auxiliary voltage always power supply l+ to module missing feed supply l+ no internal auxiliary voltage always power supply l+ to module missing feed supply l+ fuse in module defective replace module fuse blown always fuse in module defective replace module watchdog tripped always temporary high electromagnetic interference eliminate interference module defective replace module eprom error always temporary high electromagnetic interference eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of cpu module defective replace module ram error always temporary high electromagnetic interference eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of cpu module defective replace module
digital modules 3-54 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.16.3 interrupts of the sm 322; do 8 step 7 , where they are described in greater detail. enabling interrupts the interrupts are not preset ? in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. assign parameters to the interrupt enable in step 7 (refer to section 3.16.1). diagnostic interrupt if you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. the cpu interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostics interrupt block (ob 82). in the user program, you can call sfc 51 or sfc 59 in ob 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. the diagnostic information is consistent until such time as ob 82 is exited. when ob 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
digital modules 3-55 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.17 digital output module sm 322; do 8 ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 322-1cf80-0aa0 characteristics the sm 322; do 8 8 outputs, reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 4 1.5 a output current rated load voltage 48 to 125 vdc suitable for solenoid valves, dc contactors and indicator lights group error display using the module with high-speed counters please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters: note when connecting the power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the sm 322; do 8 ? 1 ? signal for approximately 50 s for reasons associated with the circuitry.
digital modules 3-56 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8 48-125 vdc/1.5 a channel number status leds ? green 1m 48 to 125 v 1 l+ 2m 48 to 125 v 2 l+ sf 1 3 5 7 9 10 backplane bus interface + 5 v + 5 v 11 13 15 17 19 20 sf fault leds ? red figure 3-17 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-57 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 8 48-125 vdc/1.5 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w 125 120 weight approx. 250 g data for specific module number of outputs 8 length of cable ? 1 ? signal min. l + ( ? 1.,2 v) output current ? 1 ? signal rated value permitted range 1.5 a 10 ma to 1.5 a ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 0.5 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 2 ms max. 15 ms lamp load max. 15 w at 48 v max. 40 w at 125 v connecting two outputs in parallel ? 1v) short-circuit protection of the output
digital modules 3-58 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.18 digital output module sm 322; do 16 16 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8 1 a output current 120 vac rated load voltage suitable for ac solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights.
digital modules 3-59 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 16 ? green backplane bus interface 5 v 5 v 2n 2l 1l 1n m m m m sf sf fault leds -red figure 3-18 module view and block diagram of digital output module sm 322; do 16
digital modules 3-60 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 16 ? 1 ? at maximum current at minimum current min. l1 ( ? 1.5 v) min. l1 ( ? 8.5 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value 1 a permitted range for 0 ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 1 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? 1 ms ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? not more than 1 ac scan cycle minimum load current 10 ma zero cross inhibit voltage non-zero cross switch size of motor starter max. size 3 according to nema lamp load max. 25 w connecting two outputs in parallel
digital modules 3-61 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 short-circuit protection of the output 120/230 vac/2 a; (6es7 322-1ffx1-0aa0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 322-1ff01-0aa0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 322-1ff81-0aa0 characteristics the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-62 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8 120/230 vac/2 a backplane bus interface 2l 1l m m 2n 1n channel number status leds ? green sf * zero cross inhibit voltage triac fault leds -red * * 5 v m m sf 5 v figure 3-19 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-63 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 8 120/230 vac/2 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? at maximum current ? at minimum current min. l1 ( ? 1.5 v) min. l1 ( ? 8.5 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value ac 2 a 1) permitted range for 0 ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 2 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? not more than 1 ac scan cycle ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? not more than 1 ac scan cycle minimum load current 10 ma zero cross inhibit voltage max. 60 v size of motor starter max. size 5 according to nema lamp load max. 50 w connecting two outputs in parallel
digital modules 3-64 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 short-circuit protection of the output 120 vac/1.0 a; (6es7 322-1el00-0aa0) order number 6es7 322-1el00-0aa0 characteristics the sm 322; do 32 120 vac/1.0 a features the following characteristics:
digital modules 3-65 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 32 120 vac/1.0 a sf3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 sf4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 4 x 3 sf1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 sf2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 channel numbers 1 l 2 n sf sf back- plane bus interface 1 n 2 l 3 l n n 4 l status display - green error display - red figure 3-20 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; d0 32 120 vac/1.0 a
digital modules 3-66 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment the following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses. output byte x output byte (x + 1) output byte (x + 2) output byte (x + 3) figure 3-21 terminal assignment of the sm 322; do 32
digital modules 3-67 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 32 120 vac/1.0 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w 125 120 weight approx. 500 g data for specific module number of outputs 32 length of cable ? 1 ? min. l1 ( ? 1.5 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value 1 a ? 0 ? signal leakage current max. 3 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? 3 ms ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? ac scan cycle zero cross inhibit voltage non-zero cross switch size of motor starter max. size 4 according to nema lamp load max. 25 w connecting two outputs in parallel
digital modules 3-68 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.21 relay output module sm 322; do 16 rel. 120 vac; (6es7 322-1hh00-0aa0) order number 6es7 322-1hh00-0aa0 characteristics the sm 322; do 16
digital modules 3-69 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 16 rel. 120 vac channel number status leds ? green l + n m m backplane bus interface n m 24 v figure 3-22 module view and block diagram of sm 322; do 16
digital modules 3-70 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 16 rel. 120 vac dimensions and w eight dimensions w
digital modules 3-71 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting two outputs in parallel rel. 230 vac; (6es7 322-1hf01-0aa0) order number 6es7 322-1hf01-0aa0 characteristics the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-72 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac status leds ? green channel number u m backplane bus interface m u 24 v m figure 3-23 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-73 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac dimensions and w eight dimensions w
digital modules 3-74 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data for selecting an actuator, continued lamp load 1) max. 50 w power no. of switching cyc. (typ.) lamp load (230 vac) 2) 1000 w 1500 w 25000 10000 energy-saving lamps/fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast 2) 10 rel. 230 vac/5 a; (6es7 322-1hf10/-1hf80-0aa0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 322-1hf10-0aa0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 322-1hf80-0aa0 characteristics the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-75 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 measures with switching currents > 3 a note to keep the additional temperature rise of the module near the connectors as low as possible, you must select a cable cross-section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting cables with switching currents > 3 a. terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac/5 a channel number status leds -green l+ 24 v m l+ m l+ m l+ m m l+ m l+ m ^ l+ m l+ l+ m m backplane bus interface l+ 1) connection possibility for contact supply i aggregate current
digital modules 3-76 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage when using relay output module 322-1hf10 with safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account: if a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more than uc 120 v. with operation at voltages greater than uc 120 v, the creepages and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the simatic requirements for safe electrical isolation. if one of the two horizontally adjacent termi- nals is operated with a safe electrical extra- low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be operated at not more than uc 120 v. figure 3-25 special characteristic for operation with a safe electrical extra-low voltage technical specifications of the sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac/5 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w
digital modules 3-77 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 current consumption
digital modules 3-78 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data for selecting an actuator, continued contact protection (internal) none connecting two outputs in parallel rel. 230 vac/5 a; (6es7 322-1hf20-0aa0) order number 6es7 322-1hf20-0aa0 characteristics the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-79 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 protection of contacts against overvoltages you protect the contacts against overvoltages by inserting jumpers (sj) on the module between terminals 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 12 and 13 etc. (refer to figure 3-26). terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac/5 a 24v 1m 1l+ 1l+ 1m backplane bus interface 1l+ 2m 2l+ 2l+ 1m 1l+ 1l+ 1m 1l+ 1m 1l+ 1m 2m 2l+ 2l+ 2m 2l+ 2m 2l+ 2m 24v 2m 1m channel number status leds -green sj sj sj sj sj sj sj sj figure 3-26 module view and block diagram of the sm 322; do 8
digital modules 3-80 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage when using relay output module 322-1hf20 with safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account: if a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more than uc 120 v. with operation at voltages greater than uc 120 v, the creepages and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the simatic requirements for safe electrical isolation. if one of the two horizontally adjacent termi- nals is operated with a safe electrical extra- low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be operated at not more than uc 120 v. figure 3-27 special characteristic for operation with a safe electrical extra-low voltage technical specifications of the sm 322; do 8 rel. 230 vac/5 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w
digital modules 3-81 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 insulation tested with ? ? sj ? jumper. 2) for ac load voltage and inserted ? sj ? jumper. (without ? sj ? jumper inserted there is a leakage current) note due to the leakage current of the rc quenching element, wrong signal states might occur when an iec type 1 input is connected (remove sj jumper)
digital modules 3-82 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.25 digital input/output module sm 323; di 16/do 16 24 vdc/0.5 a; (6es7 323-1bl00-0aa0) order number 6es7 323-1bl00-0aa0 characteristics the sm 323; di 16/do 16 ? 1 ? signal for approximately 50 ? 1 ? signal for reasons associated with the circuitry.
digital modules 3-83 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 323; di 16/do 16 24 vdc/0,5 a channel number status leds -green backplane bus interface 24v 1m m m 2l+ m 2m 3m 24v 24v 3l+ figure 3-28 module view and block diagram of the sm 323; di 16/do 16
digital modules 3-84 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 323; di 16/do 16 dc 24 v/0.5 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? 0 ? 24 vdc 13 to 30 v ? 30 to + 5 v input current ? 1 ? typ. 7 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros
digital modules 3-85 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data for selecting an actuator output voltage ? 1 ? min. l + ( ? 0.8 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value permitted range 0.5 a 5 ma to 0.6 a ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 0.5 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 100 ? 53 v) short-circuit protection of the output yes, electronic
digital modules 3-86 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 3.26 digital input/output module sm 323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a; (6es7 323-1bhx1-0aa0) order number: ? standard module ? 6es7 323-1bh01-0aa0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 323-8bh81-0aa0 characteristics the sm 323; di 8/do 8 ? 1 ? signal for approximately 50
digital modules 3-87 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal assignment and block diagram of the sm 323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a status leds ? green channel number backplane bus interface 1m 2m 24v 24v 2l+ m figure 3-30 module view and block diagram of digital input/output module sm 323; di 8/do 8
digital modules 3-88 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? 1 ? ? 0 ? 24 vdc 13 to 30 v ? 30 to 5 v input current ? 1 ? typ. 7 ma input delay ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms input characteristic curve according to iec 1131, type 1 connection of t wo-wire beros ? 1 ? min. l + ( ? 0.8 v) output current ? 1 ? rated value permitted range 0.5 a 5 ma to 0.6 a ? 0 ? (leakage current) max. 0.5 ma output delay (for resistive load) ? 0 ? to ? 1 ? ? 1 ? to ? 0 ? max. 100 ? 53 v) short-circuit protection of the output
4-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog modules changes and improvements since the previous version of the reference manual this chapter describes all new analog modules. furthermore, two new overview sections will make it easier for you to access the information: ? module overview ? section shows you the modules that are available, together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find the module suitable for your task. ? sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the module ? provides the answer to the question ? what must i do in succession to commission the module quickly and successfully? structure of the chapter the present chapter is broken down into the following subjects: 1. overview containing the modules that are available here and a description 2. information that is generally available ? in other words, affects all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics) 3. information specific to the different modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special features of the module): a) for analog input modules b) for analog output modules c) for analog input/output modules step 7 blocks for analog functions you can use the blocks fc 105 ? scale ? (scale values) and fc 106 ? unscale ? (unscale values) for reading and outputting analog values in step 7 . you will find the fcs in the standard library of step 7 in the subdirectory called ? ti-s7-converting blocks ? (for a description refer to the step 7 online help for the fcs). 4
analog modules 4-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 additional information appendix a describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0,1 and 128) in the system data. you must be familiar with this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the step 7 user program. appendix b describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. you must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the step 7 user program. in this chapter section contents page 4.1 module overview 4-4 4.2 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the analog module 4-7 4.3 analog value representation 4-8 4.4 setting the type of measurement and measuring ranges of analog input channels 4-27 4.5 behavior of analog modules 4-30 4.6 conversion, cycle, setting and response time of analog modules 4-34 4.7 assigning parameters to analog modules 4-38 4.8 connecting sensors/transmitters to analog inputs 4-43 4.9 connecting voltage sensors 4-48 4.10 connecting current sensors 4-49 4.11 connecting resistance-typethermometers and resistors 4-51 4.12 connecting thermocouples 4-55 4.13 connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs 4-62 4.14 connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs 4-63 4.15 connecting loads/actuators to current outputs 4-66 4.16 diagnostics of analog modules 4-68 4.17 analog module interrupts 4-71 4.18 analog input module sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 section page contents 4.23 analog output module sm 332; ao 4 12 bit; (6es7 332-5hd01-0ab0) 4-128 4.24 analog output module sm 332; ao 2 16 bit; (6es7 332-7nd00-0ab0) 4-140 4.26 analog input/output module sm334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.1 module overview introduction the following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog modules. this overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. table 4-1 analog input modules: characteristics at a glance module character- istics sm 331; ai 8 16 bit (-7nf00-) sm 331; ai 2
analog modules 4-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-1 analog input modules: characteristics at a glance, continued module sm 331; ai 8 16 bit (-7nf00-) sm 331; ai 8 ? ? ? ? 2-dmu two-wire transmitter table 4-2 analog output modules: characteristics at a glance module character- istics sm 332; ao 4 12 bit (-5hb01-) sm 332; ao 4 ? ? ?
analog modules 4-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-3 analog input/output modules: characteristics at a glance module character- istics sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 12 bit (-0ke00-) number of inputs 4 inputs in 1 channel group 4 inputs in 2 channel groups number of outputs 2 outputs in 1 channel group 2 outputs in 1 channel group resolution 8 bits 12 bits + sign measuring method adjustable per channel group: ?
analog modules 4-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.2 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the module introduction the following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission analog modules successfully. the sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other modules in between times. sequence of steps table 4-4 sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the analog module step procedure refer to... 1. select the module section 4.1 and specific module section from section 4.18 2. with some analog input modules: set the measuring method and measuring range by means of the measuring range module section 4.4 3. install the module in the simatic s7 network ? installation ? section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used: ? commissioning ? section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used:
analog modules 4-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.3 analog value representation introduction this section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output ranges which you can use with the analog modules. converting analog values the cpu processes the analog values in binary form only. analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form. analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal. analog value representation with 16-bit resolution the digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the same nominal range. the analog values are represented as a fixed-point number in two ? s complement. the resulting assignment is as follows: bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 value of bits 2 15 2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 sign the sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15: ? 0 ? ? 1 ? ? 0 ? ).
analog modules 4-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 example in the following example you can see how the positions not padded with ? 0 ? are written for low resolution. table 4-5 example: bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value resolution analog value bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 4.3.1 analog value representation for analog input channels introduction the tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. the values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges. notes for readers of the tables tables 4-7 to 4-8 contain the binary representation of the measured values. since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same, starting at 4-9 these tables only contain the measured values and the units.
analog modules 4-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 measured value resolution the resolution of the analog values can vary depending upon the analog module and its parameterization. with resolutions < 15 bit all bits identified with ? x ? will be set to ? 0 ? . note: this resolution does not apply to temperature values. the transformed temperature values are the result of a conversion within the analog module (see tables 4-15 through 4-29). table 4-6 possible resolutions of the analog values resolution in bits units analog value (+sign) decimal hexadecimal high byte low byte 8 128 80 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x x 9 64 40 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x 10 32 20 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x 11 16 10 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 12 8 8 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x 13 4 4 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x 14 2 2 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x 15 1 1 h vz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
analog modules 4-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 binary representation of the input ranges the input ranges shown in tables 4-7 to 4-8 are defined in two ? s complement representation: table 4-7 bipolar input ranges units measured data word range value in % 2 15 2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 32767 ? 1 ? 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1111111111 range ? 27648 ? 100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0000000000 ? 27649 ? 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 under- ? 32512 ? 117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range ? 32768 ? 117.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 underflow table 4-8 unipolar input ranges units measured data word range value in % 2 15 2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 32767 ? 1 ? 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 under- ? 4864 ? 17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0100000000 range ? 32768 ? 17.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 underflow
analog modules 4-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation in voltage measuring ranges table 4-9 analog value representation in voltage measuring ranges ? 1 ffff ? 75.000 % ? 20736 af00 ? 7.5 v ? 3.75 v ? 1.875 v ? 0.75 v ? 100.000 % ? 27648 9400 ? 10 v ? 5 v ? 2.5 v ? 1 v ? 27649 93ff underrange ? 117.593 % ? 32512 8100 ? 11.759 v ? 5.879 v ? 2.940 v ? 1.176 v ? 117.596 % ? 32513 80ff underflow ? 118.519 % ? 32768 8000 ? 11.851 v ? 5.926 v ? 2.963 v ? 1.185 v
analog modules 4-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-10 analog value representation in voltage measuring ranges ? 1 ffff ? 75.00 % ? 20763 af00 ? 375 mv ? 187.5 mv ? 60 mv ? 100.000 % ? 27648 9400 ? 500 mv ? 250 mv ? 80 mv ? 27649 93ff underrange ? 117.593 % ? 32512 8100 ? 587.9 mv ? 294.0 mv ? 94.1 mv ? 117.596 % ? 32513 80ff underflow ? 118.519 % ? 32768 8000 ? 592.6 mv ? 296.3 mv ? 94.8 mv table 4-11 analog value representation in voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 v and 0 to 10 v system voltage measuring range dec. hex. 1 to 5 v 0 to 10 v 118.515 % 32767 7fff 5.741 v 11.852 v overflow 117.593 % 32512 7f00 117.589 % 32511 7eff 5.704 v 11.759 v overrange 27649 6c01 100.000 % 27648 6c00 5 v 10 v 75 % 20736 5100 3.75 v 7.5 v 0.003617 % 1 1 1 v + 144.7 ? 1 ffff underrange ? 17.593 % ? 4864 ed00 0.296 v no negative values ? 4865 ecff possible underflow ? 17.596 % ? 32768 8000
analog modules 4-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation in current measuring ranges table 4-12 analog value representation in current measuring ranges ? 1 ffff ? 75 % ? 5100 af00 ? 15 ma ? 7.5 ma ? 2.4 ma ? 100.000 % ? 27648 9400 ? 20 ma ? 10 ma ? 3.2 ma ? 27649 93ff underrange ? 117.593 % ? 32512 8100 ? 23.52 ma ? 11.76 ma ? 3.76 ma ? 117.596 % ? 32513 80ff underflow ? 118.519 % ? 32768 8000 ? 23.70 ma ? 11.85 ma ? 3.79 ma table 4-13 analog value representation in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 ma and 4 to 20 ma system current measuring range dec. hex. 0 to 20 ma 4 to 20 ma 118.515 % 32767 7fff 23.70 ma 22.96 ma overflow 117.593 % 32512 7f00 117.589 % 32511 7eff 23.52 ma 22.81 ma overrange 27649 6c01 100.000 % 27648 6c00 20 ma 20 ma 75 % 20736 5100 15 ma 15 ma 0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 na 4 ma + 578.7 na rated range 0 % 0 0 0 ma 4 ma ? 1 ffff underrange ? 17.593 % ? 4864 ed00 ? 3.52 ma 1.185 ma ? 4865 ecff underflow ? 17.596 % ? 32768 8000
analog modules 4-15 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for resistance-type transmitters table 4-14 analog value representation for resistance-type transmitters 10 k ? 200.0 8500 : ? 2000 2134 h : f830 h 1562.0 : ? 328.0 15620 : ? 3280 3d04 h : f330 h 1123.2 : 73.2 11232 : 732 2be0 h : 2dc h rated range ? 200.1 : ? 243.0 ? 2001 : ? 2430 f82f h : f682 h ? 328.1 : ? 405.4 ? 3281 : ? 4054 f32f h : f02a h 73.1 : 30.2 731 : 302 2db h : 12e h underrange < ? 243.0 ? 32768 8000 h < ? 405.4 ? 32768 8000 h < 30.2 32768 8000 h underflow
analog modules 4-16 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors pt x00 climate table 4-16 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors pt 100. 200, 500,1000 pt x00 climate ? 120.00 13000 : ? 12000 32c8 h : d120 h 266.00 : ? 184.00 26600 : ? 18400 67e8 h : b820 h rated range ? 120.01 : ? 145.00 ? 12001 : ? 14500 d11f h : c75c h ? 184.01 : ? 229.00 ? 18401 : ? 22900 b81f h : a68c h underrange < ? 145.00 ? 32768 8000 h < ? 229.00 ? 32768 8000 h underflow analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors ni x00 standard table 4-17 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 ni x00 standard ? 60.0 ? 600 fda8 h ? 76.0 ? 760 fd08 h 213.2 2132 854 h ? 60.1 ? 601 fda7 h ? 76.1 ? 761 fd07 h 213.1 2131 853 h : : : : : : : : : underrange ? 105.0 ? 1050 fbe6 h ? 157.0 ? 1570 f9de h 168.2 1682 692 h < ? 105.0 ? 32768 8000 h < ? 157.0 ? 32768 8000 h < 168.2 32768 8000 h underflow
analog modules 4-17 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors ni x00 climate table 4-18 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 ni x00 climate ? 60.00 25000 : ? 6000 61a8 h : e890 h 280.00 : ? 76.00 28000 : ? 7600 6d60 h : e250 h rated range ? 60.01 : ? 105.00 ? 6001 : ? 10500 e88f h : d6fc h ? 76.01 : ? 157.00 ? 7601 : ? 15700 e24f h : c2ac h underrange < ? 105.00 ? 32768 8000 h < ? 157.00 ? 32768 8000 h underflow analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors cu 10 standard table 4-19 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors cu 10 cu 10 standard ? 200.0 2600 : ? 2000 a28 h : f830 h 500.0 : ? 328.0 5000 : ? 3280 1389 h : f330 h 533.2 : 73.2 5332 : 732 14d4 h : 2dc h rated range ? 200.1 : ? 240.0 ? 2001 : ? 2400 f82f h : f6a0 h ? 328.1 : ? 400.0 ? 3281 : ? 4000 f32f h : f060 h 73.1 : 33.2 731 : 332 2db h : 14c h underrange < ? 240.0 ? 32768 8000 h < ? 400.0 ? 32768 8000 h < 33.2 32768 8000 h underflow
analog modules 4-18 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors cu 10 climate table 4-20 analog value representation for rtd resistance temperature detectors cu 10 cu 10 climate ? 50.00 15000 : ? 5000 3a98 h : ec78 h 280.00 : ? 58.00 280.00 : ? 5800 6d60 h : e958 h rated range ? 50.01 : ? 60.00 ? 5001 : ? 6000 ec77 h : e890 h ? 58.01 : ? 76.00 ? 5801 : ? 7600 e957 h : e250 h underrange < ? 60.00 ? 32768 8000 h < ? 76.00 ? 32768 8000 h underflow analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type b table 4-21 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type b units units units type b in ? 32.0 27865 : ? 320 6cd9 h : fec0 h 2093.2 : 273.2 20932 : 2732 51c4 h : 0aac h rated range : ? 120.0 : ? 1200 : fb50 h : ? 184.0 : ? 1840 : f8d0 h : 153.2 : 1532 : 05fc h underrange < ? 120.0 ? 32768 8000 h < ? 184.0 ? 32768 8000 h < 153.2 32768 8000 h underflow
analog modules 4-19 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type e table 4-22 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type e type e ? 270.0 10000 : ? 2700 2710 h : f574 h 1832.0 : ? 454.0 18320 : ? 4540 4790 h : ee44 h 1273.2 : 0 12732 : 0 31bc h : 0000 h rated range < ? 270.0 < ? 2700 < f574 h < ? 454.0 < ? 4540 analog modules 4-20 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type k table 4-24 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type k units units units type k in ? 270.0 13720 : ? 2700 3598 h : f574 h 2501.6 : ? 454.0 25061 : ? 4540 61b8 h : ee44 h 1645.2 : 0 16452 : 0 4044 h : 0000 h rated range < ? 270.0 < ? 2700 < f574 h < ? 454.0 < ? 4540 analog modules 4-21 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type n table 4-26 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type n units units units type n in ? 270.0 13000 : ? 2700 32c8 h : f574 h 2372.0 : ? 454.0 23720 : ? 4540 5ca8 h : ee44 h 1573.2 : 0 15732 : 0 3d74 h : 0000 h rated range < ? 270.0 < ? 2700 < f574 h < ? 454.0 < ? 4540 analog modules 4-22 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type t table 4-28 analog value representation for thermocouple temperature detectors type t units units units type t in ? 270.0 4000 : ? 2700 0fa0 h : f574 h 752.0 : ? 454.0 7520 : ? 4540 1d60 h : ee44 h 673.2 : 3.2 6732 : 32 1aac h : 0020 h rated range < ? 270.0 < ? 2700 analog modules 4-23 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.3.2 analog value representation for analog output channels introduction the tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output channels of the analog output modules. the values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding output ranges. notes for readers of the tables tables 4-30 to 4-31 contain the binary representation of the output values. since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at 4-32 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units. output ranges for the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 ? s complement representation:
analog modules 4-24 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-30 bipolar output ranges units output data word range value in % 2 15 2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 ? 1 ? 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1111111111 range ? 27648 ? 100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0000000000 ? 27649 ? 32512 ? 117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0100000000 range ? 1 0.000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 limited to rated range ? 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0100000000 range lower limit 0 v and 0 ma
analog modules 4-25 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation in voltage output ranges table 4-32 analog value representation in output range ? 1 ffff ? 361.7 ? 75 % ? 20736 af00 ? 7.5 v ? 100 % ? 27648 9400 ? 10 v ? 27649 93ff underrange ? 117.593 % ? 32512 8100 ? 11.76 v ? 32513 80ff underflow, off circuit and de-energized ? 118.519 % ? 32768 8000 0.00 v table 4-33 analog value representation in output ranges 0 to 10 v and 1 to 5 v system voltage output range dec. hex . 0 to 10 v 1 to 5 v 118.5149 % 32767 7fff 0.00 v 0.00 v overflow, off circuit and de- 32512 7f00 energized 117.589 % 32511 7eff 11.76 v 5.70 v overrange 27649 6c01 100 % 27648 6c00 10 v 5 v 75 % 20736 5100 7.5 v 3.75 v 0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 ? 1 ffff underrange ? 25 % ? 6912 e500 0 v ? 6913 e4ff not possible. ? 117.593 % ? 32512 8100 the output value is limited to 0 v. ? 32513 80ff underflow, off circuit and ? 118.519 % ? 32768 8000 0.00 v 0.00 v de-energized
analog modules 4-26 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value representation in current output ranges table 4-34 analog value representation in output range ? 1 ffff ? 723.4 na ? 75 % ? 20736 af00 ? 15 ma ? 100 % ? 27648 9400 ? 20 ma ? 27649 93ff underrange ? 117.593 % ? 32512 8100 ? 23.52 ma ? 32513 80ff underflow, off circuit and de-energized ? 118.519 % ? 32768 8000 0.00 ma table 4-35 analog value representation in output ranges 0 and 20 ma and 4 to 20 ma system current output range dec. hex . 0 to 20 ma 4 to 20 ma: 118.5149 % 32767 7fff 0.00 ma 0.00 ma overflow, off circuit 32512 7f00 and de-energized 117.589 % 32511 7eff 23.52 ma 22.81 ma overrange 27649 6c01 100 % 27648 6c00 20 ma 20 ma 75 % 20736 5100 15 ma 15 ma 0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 na 4ma+578.7 na rated range 0 % 0 0 0 ma 4 ma ? 1 ffff underrange ? 25 % ? 6912 e500 0 ma ? 6913 e4ff not possible. the ? 117.593 % ? 32512 8100 output value is limi- ted to 0 ma. ? 32513 80ff underflow, off circuit ? 118.519 % ? 32768 8000 0.00 ma 0.00 ma and de-energized
analog modules 4-27 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.4 setting the measuring method and measuring ranges of analog input channels two procedures there are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules: step 7 step 7 which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections. the procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in step 7 is described in section 4.7. the following section describes how you set the measuring method and the measuring range by means of measuring range modules. setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges with measuring range modules if the analog modules haves measuring range modules, they are supplied with the measuring range modules plugged in. if necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. note make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module. before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another measuring range. possible settings for the measuring range modules the measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: ? a ? , ? b ? , ? c ? and ? d ? . which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific module section. the settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also printed on the analog module.
analog modules 4-28 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 replugging measuring range modules if you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps: 1. use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input module. 1 2 figure 4-1 easing measuring range modules from the analog input module
analog modules 4-29 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 2. insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1)) into the analog input module. the measuring range selected is the one that points to the marker point on module (2). 1 2 figure 4-2 inserting measuring range modules into the analog input module perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules. the next step is to install the module. ! caution if you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be destroyed. make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before connecting a sensor to the module.
analog modules 4-30 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.5 behavior of the analog modules introduction in this section, you will find information on: ? up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed until the first conversion... ? up has been completed, a signal of 0 ma or 0 v is output. ? up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed (default values: 0 ma/0 v) l+ missing overflow value 0 ma/0 v power ? l+ present ? 0 ma/0 v off l+ missing ? 0 ma/0 v
analog modules 4-31 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 behavior on failure of the supply voltage failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the sf led on the module. furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnostic buffer). triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see section 4.7). 4.5.2 effect of range of values of the analog values effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter assignment. you will find the errors that might be involved in section 4.16. effect of range of values on the analog input module the behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within the range of values. table 4-37 behavior of the analog input modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the range of values measured va- lue within input value sf led diagnostics interrupt rated range measured value ? ? ? overrange/ underrange measured value ? ? ? overflow 7fff h flashes 1 entered 1 diagnostic interrupt 1 underflow 8000 h flashes 1 entered 1 diagnostic interrupt 1 beyond the programmed limit measured value ? ? process interrupt 1 1 only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment
analog modules 4-32 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 effect of range of values on the analog output module the behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within the value range. table 4-38 behavior of the analog output modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the range of values process value lies within output value sf led diagnostics interrupt rated range cpu value ? ? ? overrange/ underrange cpu value ? ? ? overflow 0 signal ? ? ? underflow 0 signal ? ? ?
analog modules 4-33 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.5.3 effect of operational limit and basic error limit operational limit the operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated range of the module. basic error limit the basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 12 bit is being used for voltage output. the output range from ? 0 to 10 v ? is being used. the module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30 ? 1 v (
analog modules 4-34 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.6 conversion, cycle, setting and response time of analog modules conversion time of analog input channels the conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing times of the module for: step 7 (refer to section 4.7.1). for the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at section 4.18. scan time of analog input channels analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially ? in other words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. the scan time ? in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the analog input module. the following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel analog module. conversion time, channel 1 conversion time, channel 2 conversion time, channel n cycle time figure 4-4 scan time of an analog input or output module
analog modules 4-35 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 conversion and scan times for analog input channels in channel groups when the analog input channels are grouped in channel groups, you must take into account the conversion time channel group by channel group. example two analog input channels channels of the analog input module sm 331; ai 2 step 7 for some analog input modules. using smoothing smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing. it makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values ? for example, with temperature measurements. smoothing principle the measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. smoothing is accomplished by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted (digitized) analog values. the user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low, average, high). the level determines the number of analog signals used for averaging. the higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a step response (refer to the following example) example.
analog modules 4-36 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 example the following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100 % applied, as a function of the smoothing that has been set. the figure applies to every change of signal at the analog input. 50 100 0 63 50 100 150 200 smoothing: low: average: high: module cycles signal variation in percent step response for any analog input signal figure 4-5 example of the influence of smoothing on the step response additional information on smoothing refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from section 4.18) to determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any special features that have to be taken into account. conversion time of the analog output channels the conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog conversion. scan time of analog output channels the analog output channels are converted sequentially ? in other words, the analog output channels are converted one after the other. the scan time ? in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output channels (refer to 4-4).
analog modules 4-37 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 tip you should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in step 7 . overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules t a t z t e t 1 t 2 t a = response time t z = cycle time corresponds to n ? in other words, the time elapsing from application the converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output ? is load-dependent. a distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive loads. for the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at section 4.23. response time the response time (t 1 to t 3 ) ? in other words, the time elapsing from application of the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached at the analog output ? in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the settling time. you have a worst case situation, if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all other channels are converted (cycle time).
analog modules 4-38 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.7 analog module parameter assignment introduction analog modules can have different characteristics. you can set the characteristics of the modules by means of parameter assignment. tools for parameter assignment you assign parameters to analog modules with step 7 . you must perform parameter assignment in stop mode of the cpu. when you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the cpu. on a transition from stop to run mode, the cpu then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules. in addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the module in the necessary position (refer to section 4.4). static and dynamic parameters the parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. set the static parameters in stop mode of the cpu, as described above. you can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by means of sfcs. note, however, that after a change from run step 7 apply again. you will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in appendix a. parameter settable with cpu operating state static programming device stop dynamic programming device stop sfc 55 in the user program run
analog modules 4-39 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.7.1 parameters of the analog input modules the analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. refer to the section on the module concerned, starting from section 4.18, for the subset ? mastered ? by the specific analog modules. the default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in step 7 . table 4-39 parameters of the analog input modules parameter value range default settings para- meter type scope enable ? 32512 ? 32512 to 32511 ? dynamic channel or channel group diagnostics
analog modules 4-40 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-39 parameters of the analog input modules, continued parameter scope para- meter type default settings value range measurement
analog modules 4-41 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-39 parameters of the analog input modules, continued parameter scope para- meter type default settings value range ? for example, 27648 at 80 mv (refer to table 4-10) 2) the module supplies a temperature value to the cpu ? for example, 120 ? mastered ? by the specific analog modules. the default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in step 7 . table 4-40 parameters of the analog output modules parameter value range default settings para- meter type scope enable
analog modules 4-42 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.7.3 parameters of the analog input/output modules the analog input/output modules make available the parameters contained in the following table. the default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in step 7 . table 4-41 sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 x 12 bit: parameters parameter value range default setting para- meter type scope input measurement
analog modules 4-43 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.8 connecting sensors to analog inputs introduction you can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors. this section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow. cables for analog signals to reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for the analog signals. the shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at both cable ends. if there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog signals. in such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only. isolated analog input modules with the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit m ana and the m terminal of the cpu. you must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference e iso can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit m ana and the m terminal of the cpu. by means of a equipotential bonding conductor between the m ana terminal and the m terminal of the cpu, make sure that e iso does not exceed the permitted value. non-isolated analog input modules with the non-isolated analog input modules, you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit m ana and the m terminal of the cpu. establish im 153. for this purpose, connect the m ana terminal with the m terminal of the cpu and im 153. a potential difference between m ana and the m terminal of the cpu and the im 153 can result in corruption of the analog signal.
analog modules 4-44 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 limited potential difference e cm only a limited potential difference e cm (common mode voltage) may occur between the measuring lines m ? of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit m ana . in order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the sensors. abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below the abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: m +: measuring lead (positive) m ? : measuring lead (negative) m ana : reference potential of the analog measuring circuit m: ground terminal l +: terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage e cm : potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the m ana measuring circuit e iso : potential difference between m ana and m terminal of cpu connecting isolated sensors the isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground). they can be operated free of potential. with isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. these potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the sensors. in order to prevent the permissible value for e cm from being exceeded when operating in areas with heavy emc interference, we recommend you to connect m ? with m ana .
analog modules 4-45 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 you can operate the cpu in grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or ungrounded mode. isolated sensors m+ m l+ m ? m ana m+ m ? backplane bus adc m internal l+ m ground bus cpu e iso logic recommended connection figure 4-7 connecting isolated sensors to an isolated ai isolated sensors m+ m l+ m ? m ana m+ m ? backplane bus m internal l+ m ground bus cpu adc logic recommended connection figure 4-8 connecting isolated sensors to a non-isolated ai
analog modules 4-46 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 note do not connect m ? to m ana when connecting two-wire transmitters for current measurement and resistance-type sensors. this also applies to inputs which are not used. non-isolated sensors the non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local ground). when using non-isolated sensors, you must connect m ana to the local ground. connecting non-isolated sensors caused by local conditions or interferences potential differences e cm (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. if the potential difference e cm exceeds the permissible value, you must provide equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points. when connecting non-isolated sensors to optically isolated modules, you can operate the cpu in grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or ungrounded mode. non-isolated sensors m+ m l+ m ? m ana m+ m ? backplane bus e cm adc m internal l+ m ground bus cpu e iso logic equipotential bonding conductor figure 4-9 connecting non-isolated sensors to an isolated ai
analog modules 4-47 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 when connecting non-isolated sensors to non-isolated modules, you can operate the cpu only in grounded mode. non-isolated sensors m+ m l+ m ? m ana m+ m ? backplane bus m internal l+ m ground bus cpu adc logic e cm equipotential bonding conductor figure 4-10 connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated ai note non-isolated 2-wire transmitters and non-isolated resistance-type sensors may not be used with non-isolated ai!
analog modules 4-48 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.9 connecting voltage sensors note the necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. in other words, you must continue to take note of and implement section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors. abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below the abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following meanings: m +: measuring lead (positive) m ? : measuring lead (negative) m ana : reference potential of the analog measuring circuit m : ground terminal l +: terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage connection of voltage sensors m+ m l+ m ? m ana m+ m ? adc + ? u + ? u backplane bus logic figure 4-11 connecting voltage sensors to an isolated ai
analog modules 4-49 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.10 connecting current sensors note the necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. in other words, you must continue to take note of and implement section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors. abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below the abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: m +: measuring lead (positive) m ? : measuring lead (negative) m ana : reference potential of the analog measuring circuit m : ground terminal l +: terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage supply voltage of the sensors the two-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the terminals of the analog input module. this transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. two-wire transmitters must be isolated sensors. four-wire transmitters have separate power supplies.
analog modules 4-50 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting two-wire transmitters m+ m l+ m ? m ana m+ m ? adc two-wire transmitter two-wire transmitter p p + ? + ? sensor, for example, pressure gauge backplane bus logic figure 4-12 connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated ai when the supply voltage l+ is fed from the module, you must assign parameters to the two-wire transmitter as a four-wire transmitter in step 7 . m l+ m ana m+ m ? adc two-wire transmitter + ? backplane bus logic m figure 4-13 connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from l+ to an isolated ai
analog modules 4-51 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting four-wire transmitters m+ m l+ m ? m ana m+ m ? adc p p sensor, for example, pressure gauge + ? + ? l+ m backplane bus logic four-wire transmitter figure 4-14 connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated ai 4.11 connecting resistance thermometers and resistors note the necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. in other words, you must continue to take note of and implement section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors. abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below the abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: i c+ : constant-current lead (positive) i c ? : constant-current lead (negative) m + : measuring lead (positive) m ? : measuring lead (negative) m ana : reference potential of the analog measuring circuit m: ground terminal l + : terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage
analog modules 4-52 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting resistance thermometers and resistors the resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-wire, three-wire or two-conductor terminal. with four-wire and four-conductor terminals, the module supplies a constant current via terminals i c + and i c ? so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is compensated. it is important that the connected constant current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor. measurements with four-wire or three-conductor terminals supply a more precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a two-conductor terminal. four-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer the voltage generated at the resistance-type thermometer is measured via the m + and m ? terminals. when you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect i c + and m+ as well as i c ? and m ? to the resistance thermometer). when connecting, make sure that the connected cables i c + and m+ and the cables i c ? and m ? are connected directly to the resistance thermometer. m+ m l+ m ? m ana adc i c+ i c ? i c backplane bus logic figure 4-15 four-wire connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated ai
analog modules 4-53 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 three-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer with a three-conductor terminal on modules with four terminals, you must normally insert a jumper between m ? and i c ? (refer to figure 4-16). take note of the exception for the sm 331; ai 8 ? m ana adc i c+ i c ? i c backplane bus logic figure 4-16 three-wire connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated ai three-conductor connection to the sm 331; ai 8 ? and m ? are connected directly to the resistance thermometer. m+ m l+ m ? m ana adc i c+ i c ? i c backplane bus logic figure 4-17 three-wire connection of resistance thermometers to the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-54 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ! caution incorrect wiring of the three-conductor terminal can lead to unforeseen operation of the module and dangerous conditions in the system. two-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer with a two-conductor terminal, you must insert jumpers on the module between m + and i c+ and between m ? and i c ? . m+ m l+ m ? m ana adc i c+ i c ? backplane bus logic figure 4-18 two-wire connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated ai
analog modules 4-55 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.12 connecting thermocouples design of thermocouples a thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and connecting parts. the thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends. there are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material used ? for example, k, j, n thermocouples. the measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.
analog modules 4-56 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 compensation of the reference junction temperature you can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference junction by means of compensating leads. there are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point. you can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference junction to be. table 4-42 options for compensation of the reference junction temperature option explanation no compensation when you want to acquire only the difference in temperature between the measuring point and the reference junction internal compensation (refer to figure 4-20 for connection) if you employ internal compensation, the internal temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the module is used for comparison purposes. external compensation with compensating box in the leads of an individual thermocouple (refer to figures 4-21 and 4-22 for its connection) you have already acquired and compensated the reference junction temperature (thermocouple external comparison) using a compensating box, which you have looped into an individual thermocouple. no further processing is necessary owing to the module. only for sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-57 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 theory of operation of external compensation with compensating box if you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example. the compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction temperature. the reference junction is formed by the connections for the ends of the thermocouple ? s compensating leads. if the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. this results in a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f. abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below the abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: m +: measuring lead (positive) m ? : measuring lead (negative) comp + : compensating terminal (positive) comp ? : compensating terminal (negative) m ana : reference potential of the analog measuring circuit m : ground terminal l +: terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage note the necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. in other words, you must continue to take note of and implement section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors.
analog modules 4-58 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connection of thermocouples with internal compensation connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means of compensating lines. each channel group can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups. m+ m ? m+ m ? adc m l+ comp ? /m ana comp + compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) backplane bus logic figure 4-20 connection of thermocouples with internal compensation to an isolated ai connecting the compensating box connect the compensating box to the comp terminals of the module, locating the compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples. the compensating box must have an isolated supply. the power supply must have adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding. the terminals for connecting the thermocouple to the compensating box are not required and must therefore be shorted (refer to figure 4-22 for an example). the following constraints apply:
analog modules 4-59 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting thermocouples with compensating box if all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same reference junction, you compensate as follows: m+ m ? m+ m ? backplane bus adc m l+ compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) box comp. ref. junction m l+ copper wire comp ? /m ana comp + thermo- couples logic figure 4-21 connection of thermocouples with compensation box to an isolated ai note use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0
analog modules 4-60 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-43 ordering data of the comparison point recommended compensating box order number reference junction with integrated power supply unit, for rail mounting auxiliary power 220 vac 110 vac 24 vac 24 vdc connection to thermocouple fe-cuni type l fe/cu ni type j ni cr/ni type k pt 10 % rh/pt type s pt 13 % rh/pt type r cu-cuni type u cu/cu ni type t reference temperature 0 ? m+ m ? backplane bus adc m l+ compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) copper wire comp ? /m ana comp + thermo- couples logic 1 3 auxiliary power + ? the terminals for the compensating wire must be short- circuited. output (cu wires) 8 9 11 12 ? + siemens m72166- figure 4-22 connection of thermocouples with comparison point (order no. m72166-xxx00) to an isolated ai
analog modules 4-61 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the sm 331; ai 8 ? kv + thermo- couples logic ic + ic ? rtd at kv input kv + : cold junction (positive) kv ? : cold junction (negative) ic + : constant-current lead (positive) ic ? : constant-current lead (negative) m+ m ? m+ m ? figure 4-23 sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-62 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.13 connecting loads/actuators to analog output introduction you can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current and voltage. this section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow. cables for analog signals for the analog signals , you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. the cables q v and s+ and m and s ? , respectively, are to be twisted together. this reduces the interference . ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables. if there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. in such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only. isolated analog output modules with the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit m ana and the m terminal of the cpu. you must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference e iso can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit m ana and the m terminal of the cpu. by means of a equipotential bonding conductor between the m ana terminal and the m terminal of the cpu, make sure that e iso does not exceed the permitted value. non-isolated analog output modules with the non-isolated analog output modules, you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit m ana and the m terminal of the cpu. therefore, connect the m ana terminal with the m terminal of the cpu. a potential difference between m ana and the m terminal of the cpu can lead to a corruption of the analog signal.
analog modules 4-63 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.14 connecting loads and actuators to voltage outputs connecting loads to a voltage output connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-wire and a two-wire circuit. however, not all analog output modules allow both types of connection. note the necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. in other words, you must continue to take note of and implement section 4.13 with its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators. abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below the abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: q v : analog output voltage s +: detector lead (positive) s ? : detector lead (negative) m ana : reference potential of analog circuit r l : load impedance l +: terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage m : ground terminal e iso : potential difference between m ana and m terminal of cpu.
analog modules 4-64 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting loads to a voltage output of an isolated module over a four-wire circuit a high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-wire circuit. you must therefore connect the sensor leads (s ? and s+) directly to the load. the voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load. interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead s ? and the reference circuit of the analog circuit m ana . this potential difference must not exceed the permissible value. if the permissible potential difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired. m l+ dac r l q v m ana m internal l+ m ground bus cpu s+ s ? e iso backplane bus logic figure 4-24 connecting loads to a voltage output of an isolated ao over a four-wire circuit
analog modules 4-65 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated module over a two-wire circuit with a two-wire circuit, the s+ and s ? terminals can be left open. however, you will not achieve the accuracy of a four-wire circuit. connect the load to terminals q v and the reference point of the measuring circuit, m ana . m l+ backplane bus dac m internal l+ m ground bus cpu logic r l q v m ana figure 4-25 connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated ao over a two-wire circuit
analog modules 4-66 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.15 connecting loads and actuators to current outputs note the necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. in other words, you must continue to take note of and implement section 4.13 with its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators. abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below the abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: q i : analog output current m ana : reference potential of analog circuit r l : load impedance l +: terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage m : ground terminal e iso : potential difference between m ana and m terminal of cpu. connecting loads to a current output you must connect loads to q i and the reference point of the analog circuit m ana of a current output. m l+ backplane bus dac r l q i m ana m internal l+ m ground bus cpu e iso logic figure 4-26 connecting loads to a current output of an isolated ao
analog modules 4-67 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 m l+ backplane bus dac r l q i m ana m internal l+ m ground bus cpu logic figure 4-27 connecting loads to a current output of a non-isolated ao
analog modules 4-68 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.16 diagnostics of the analog modules programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages in diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. you obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment. you perform parameter assignment in the ? diagnostics ? parameter field in step 7 (refer to section 4.7). non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled. actions following diagnostic message in step 7 each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: ? enable diagnostic interrupt ? with step 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and ob 82 is called (refer to section 4.17). reading out diagnostic messages you can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of sfcs in the user program (refer to the appendix ? diagnostic data of signal modules ? ). you can view the cause of the error in step 7 , in the module diagnosis (refer to online help for step 7 ). diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules every analog input module supplies the measured value 7fff h irrespective of the parameter assignment when an error is detected. this measured value means either overflow, malfunction or a channel is disabled. diagnostic message by means of sf led every analog module indicates errors for you by means of your sf led (group error led). the sf led lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the analog module. it goes out when all errors have been rectified.
analog modules 4-69 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostic messages of the analog input modules the table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules. table 4-44 diagnostic messages of the analog input modules diagnostics message led diagnostics effective for parameterizable external auxiliary supply missing sf module no configuring/parameter assignment error sf channel yes common-mode error sf channel yes wire break sf channel yes underflow sf channel yes overflow sf channel yes diagnostic messages of the analog output modules the table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog output modules. table 4-45 diagnostics messages of the analog output modules diagnostics message led diagnostics effective for parameterizable external auxiliary supply missing sf module no configuring/parameter assignment error sf channel yes short-circuit to m sf channel yes wire break sf channel yes note a prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in step 7 .
analog modules 4-70 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 causes of errors and remedial measures for analog input modules table 4-46 diagnostics messages of the analog input modules, causes of errors and remedial measures diagnostics message possible error cause remedy external load voltage missing load voltage l+ of module missing feed supply l+ configuring/parameter illegal parameters transferred to check measuring range module assignment error module reassign module parameter common-mode error potential difference e cm between the inputs (m ? ) and reference potential of measuring circuit (m ana ) too high connect m ? with m ana wire break resistance too high in the sensor connection use different type of sensor or connection, e.g. use conductors with a larger cross-sectional core area open circuit between module and sensor close circuit channel not connected (open) disable channel group ( ? measuring procedure ? parameter) connect channel underflow input value underflows underrange, error may be caused: wrong measuring range selected configure other measuring range with the measuring ranges 4 to 20 ma and 1 to 5 v, if necessary by polarity reversal of sensor connection check terminals overflow input value overflows overrange configure other measuring range
analog modules 4-71 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 causes of errors and remedial measures for analog output modules table 4-47 diagnostics messages of the analog output modules, causes of errors and remedial measures diagnostics message possible error cause remedy external load voltage missing load voltage l+ of module missing feed supply l+ configuring/parameter assignment error illegal parameters transferred to module reassign module parameter short-circuit after m overload of output eliminate overload short-circuit of output q v after m ana eliminate short circuit wire break actuator resistance too high use different type of actuator or connection, e.g. use conductors with a larger cross-sectional core area open circuit between module and actuator close circuit channel not used (open) disable channel group ( ? output type ? parameter) 4.17 interrupts of the analog modules introduction in this section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. the following interrupts exist: step 7 , where they are described in greater detail.
analog modules 4-72 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 enabling interrupts the interrupts are not preset ? in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. assign parameters to the interrupt enable in step 7 (refer to section 4.7). diagnostic interrupt if you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. the cpu interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostics alarm block (ob 82). in the user program, you can call sfc 51 or sfc 59 in ob 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. the diagnostic information is consistent until such time as ob 82 is exited. when ob 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module. hardware interrupt with trigger ? upper or lower limit exceeded ? define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. if the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a process interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled. the cpu interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt block (ob 40). in the user program of ob 40, you can set how the programmable logic controller is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached. when ob 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module. note note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange.
analog modules 4-73 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 structure of the start information tag ob40_point_addr of ob 40 the limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of ob 40 in the tag ob40_point_addr. the following figure shows the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8. 1 16 bit no. 17 31 30 29 28 27 26 ld 8 1 lb 8 lb 9 25 24 value exceeds upper limit in channel 0 value falls below lower limit in channel 0 value exceeds upper limit in channel 1 lb 11 0 1 value falls below lower limit in channel 1 11 .0 .1 figure 4-28 start information of ob 40: which event has triggered the hardware interrupt at the limit value hardware interrupt upon trigger ? reached end of scan cycle ? by parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle, you have the option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module. a scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled channels of the analog input module. the module processes the channels one after the other. after all the measured values have been converted, the module of the cpu reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on all channels. you can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values.
analog modules 4-74 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.18 analog input module sm 331; ai 8 ? 9 bits + sign ? 12 bit + sign ? 14 bit + sign ? voltage ? current ? resistors ? temperature
analog modules 4-75 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the sm 331; ai 8 12 bit m 3 ? / mana fault indicator - red thermocouples, voltage measurement current measurement resistance test m 0 + m 0
analog modules 4-76 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 331; ai 8 12 bit dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? at signal = 0 v ? not for two-wire transmitter 2.5 vdc
analog modules 4-77 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 suppression of interference, limits of error suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 ?; ?; ? ?; ?; ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
analog modules 4-78 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connection of the sensor ?
analog modules 4-79 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.18.1 commissioning the sm 331; ai 8 12 bit you set the mode of operation of the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . meas. range module if necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. the steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in section 4.4. the corresponding table in section 4.18.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. in addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module. default settings for measuring range module the measuring range modules are preset to ? b ? (voltage; step 7 is not necessary. table 4-48 default settings of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-80 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 parameter you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. table 4-49 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 ? 32512 ? 32512 to 32511 ? dynamic channel diagnostics
analog modules 4-81 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 channel groups the channels of the sm 331; ai 8 12 bit are arranged in four groups of two. you can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. the analog input module sm 331; ai 8 ? 2nd ? channel of each group is used for current injection (i c ). the measured value is obtained by accessing the ? 1st ? channel of the group. the ? 2nd ? channel of the group has the default carry value ? 7fff h ? . special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts you can set hardware interrupts in step 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case ? in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2 diagnostics you will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-44, on page 4-69.
analog modules 4-82 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.18.2 measuring methods and measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 12 bit measuring methods you can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: ? measuring method ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels you must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to m ana . in this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. set the ? measuring method ? parameter for unused channels to ? disabled ? . in this way you shorten the scan time of the module. if you do not use the comp input, you must short-circuit it also. special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
analog modules 4-83 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 special characteristic when all channels are disabled if you disable all input channels of the module and enable diagnostics when parameterizing the analog input module sm 331; ai 8 ? external auxiliary voltage ? is missing. measuring ranges you perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and with the ? measuring method ? parameter in step 7 . table 4-51 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
analog modules 4-84 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-51 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] step 7 are the ? voltage ? measuring method und the ? ? measuring range. you can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . wire-break check the wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (thermocouples and bulb resistors). special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 ma measuring range with a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 ma and enabled wire-break check , the analog input module enters wire break in the diagnosis when a current falls below 3.6 ma. if you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. if no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated sf led is the only indication of the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. with a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 ma and disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.
analog modules 4-85 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.19 analog input module sm 331; ai 8 16 bit has the following characteristic features: ? voltage ? current
analog modules 4-86 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the sm 331; ai 8 ? cho v + ? ch1 v + ? ch2 v + ? ch3 v + ? ch4 v + ? ch5 v + ? ch6 v + ? ch7 21 29 26 27 24 25 22 23 33 32 35 34 37 36 39 38 28 40 31 30 a/d1 a/d2 back- plane bus interface module sf galvanic isolation sf fault indicator - red figure 4-30 module view and block diagram of the analog input module sm 331; ai 8 16 bit note that channel 0 is configured for current and channel 7 is configured for voltage. note an external protective network is required in the signal leads conforming according to iec 61000-4-5 (150 v/14 mm mov across each + and ? input to chassis ground)
analog modules 4-87 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 wiring of the module for measuring current current measurements are made by paralleling a channel ? s voltage input terminals with its respective current sense resistor. this is accomplished by jumpering the channels input terminals to the adjacent terminals on the field connector. for example, to configure channel 0 for current mode, you must jumper terminal 22 to 2 and terminal 23 to 3. the channel being configured for current measurements must be paired with the sense resistor connected to the channel ? s adjacent terminals in order to achieve the specified accuracy. technical specifications of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-88 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 suppression of interference, limits of error suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
analog modules 4-89 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.19.1 commissioning the sm 331; ai 8 16 bit you set the mode of operation of the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . parameter you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. table 4-52 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 ? 32512 ? 32512 to 32511 ? dynamic channel diagnostics
analog modules 4-90 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 channel groups the channels of the sm 331; ai 8 16 bit are arranged in four groups of two. you can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. the table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. you will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an sfc. table 4-53 assignment of channels of the sm 331; ai 8 ? measuring method ? parameter is set. however, only channel group 0 or only channel 1 (in other words, not both together) must be enabled. special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts you can set hardware interrupts in step 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case ? in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2 diagnostics you will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-44, on page 4-69.
analog modules 4-91 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.19.2 measuring methods and measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 16 bit measuring methods you can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: ? measuring method ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels set the ? measuring method ? parameter for unused channels to ? disabled ? . in this way you shorten the scan time of the module. since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. ? measuring range ? parameter in step 7 . table 4-54 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-92 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 default settings the default settings of the module are ? voltage ? for the measuring method ? ? for the measuring range. you can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . measuring errors with common-mode voltages the sm 331; ai 8 x 16 bit can make measurements in the presence of ac or dc common mode voltage. for ac common mode voltages at multiples of the filter frequency setting, the rejection is accomplished by the integration period of the a/d converter and by the common mode rejection of the input amplifiers. for ac common mode voltages < 35 v rms , the rejection ratio of > 100 db results in negligible measurement error. for dc common mode voltages , only the rejection of the input amplifier stage is available to minimize the effect of the common mode voltage. therefore, some accuracy degradation occurs in proportion to the common mode voltage. the worst case error occurs with 50 vdc between one channel and the other seven channels. the calculated worst case error is 0.7 % from 0 to 60 degrees c, and measured error is typically 3 0.1 % @ 25 degrees c. special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values the parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the sm 331; ai 8 x 16 bit from the range of values contained in table 4-52. the reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases. the process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and can vary between the lower limits shown in the table below and 32511 (7eff h ). limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit values shown in the table below. table 4-55 minimum possible upper and lower limit values of sm 331; ai 8 ? 11.369 v ? 31433 8537 h ? 5.684 v ? 31430 853a h
analog modules 4-93 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-55 minimum possible upper and lower limit values of sm 331; ai 8 ? 4864 ed00 h 0 to 20 ma 22.37 ma 31432 7ac8 h ? 3.19 ma ? 4864 ed00 h 4 to 20 ma 22.37 ma 32378 7e7a h 1.185 ma ? 4864 ed00 h ? 22.737 ma ? 31432 8538 h wire-break check the wire-break check is available for the 1 to 5 v voltage range and the 4 to 20 ma current range. the following applies to both measuring ranges: enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters a wire break in the diagnosis if a current falls below 3.6 ma (0.9 v). if you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. if no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated sf led is the only indication of the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. with a disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.
analog modules 4-94 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.20 analog input module sm 331; ai 2 ? standard module ? 6es7 331-7kb02-0ab0 order number: ? simatic outdoor module ? 6es7 331-7kb82-0ab0 characteristics the analog input module sm 331; ai 2 ? 9 bits + sign ? 12 bits + sign ? 14 bits + sign ? voltage ? current ? resistor ? temperature
analog modules 4-95 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the sm 331; ai 2 ? / mana comp + external compensation comp m m t figure 4-31 module view and block diagram of the analog input module sm 331; ai 2
analog modules 4-96 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 331; ai 2 ? at signal = 0 v ? not for two-wire transmitter 2.5 vdc
analog modules 4-97 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 suppression of interference, limits of error suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 ?; ?; ? ?; ?; ? ? ? ? ? /100 ? /100 ? /100 ? /100 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
analog modules 4-98 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connection of the sensor ?
analog modules 4-99 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.20.1 commissioning the sm 331; ai 2 step 7 . measuring range module if necessary, the measuring range module must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. the steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in section 4.4. the corresponding table in section 4.20.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. in addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module. default settings for measuring range module the measuring range module is preset to ? b ? (voltage; step 7 is not necessary. table 4-56 default settings of the sm 331; ai 2
analog modules 4-100 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 parameter you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. table 4-57 parameters of the sm 331; ai 2 ? 32512 ? 32512 to 32511 ? dynamic channel diagnostics
analog modules 4-101 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 channel groups the two channels of the analog input module sm 331; ai 2 ? 2nd ? channel is used for current injection (i c ). the measured value is obtained by accessing the ? 1st ? channel. the ? 2nd ? channel has the default carry value ? 7fff h ? . special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts you can set a process interrupt in step 7 for the channel group. note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case ? in other words, for channel 0. diagnostics you will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-44, on page 4-69.
analog modules 4-102 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.20.2 measuring methods and measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 2 ? measuring method ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels you must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to m ana . in this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. set the ? measuring method ? parameter for unused channels to ? disabled ? . in this way you shorten the scan time of the module. if you do not use the comp input, you must short-circuit it also. special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
analog modules 4-103 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 measuring ranges you perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range module on the module and with the ? measuring method ? parameter in step 7 . table 4-58 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
analog modules 4-104 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-58 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] step 7 are the ? voltage ? measuring method und the ? ? measuring range. you can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . wire-break check the wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (thermocouples and bulb resistors). special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 ma measuring range with a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 ma and enabled wire-break check , the analog input module enters wire break in the diagnosis when a current falls below 3.6 ma. if you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. if no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated sf led is the only indication of the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. with a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 ma and disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.
analog modules 4-105 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.21 analog input module sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-106 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-107 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-108 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 basic response time of module (all channels enabled) 40 / 79 / 84 ms operating mode 4 channels, hardware integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel)
analog modules 4-109 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.21.1 commissioning the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . parameter you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. table 4-59 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 ? 32512 ? 32512 to 32511 ? dynamic channel diagnostics
analog modules 4-110 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-59 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 rtd are arranged in four groups of two. you can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. the table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. you will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an sfc. table 4-60 assignment of channels of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-111 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit violation you can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in step 7 . operating mode the sm 331; ai 8 ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? ? software filter, 8 channels ? ? hardware filter, 4 channels ? the operating mode affects the scan time of the module. high speed update mode with high speed updating, updating of not more than 4 channels is performed in only 10 ms. high speed updating is possible only in ? hardware filter, 4 channels ? mode. in this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. you must only use the channels with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6) on the module. scan time in ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? mode in ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? mode, the module always converts the analog values simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers, followed the channels with odd numbers. the scan time for the module results in: scan time = (t k + t u )
analog modules 4-112 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 scan time in ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode in ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode, analog-to-digital conversion is performed in exactly the same manner as in ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? mode. in other words, the analog values are always converted simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers and then for the channels with odd numbers. the channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference frequency suppression. this relationship is shown in the table that follows. table 4-61 scan times in ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode programmed interference frequency suppression channel scan time* module scan time (all channels) 50 hz 42 ms 84 ms 60 hz 37 ms 74 ms 400 hz 20 ms 40 ms * channel scan time = channel conversion time + 12 ms switching time to the other channel in the channel group scan time in ? hardware filter, 4 channels ? mode in this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. the module converts the channels with even numbers simultaneously. this results for the scan time in: channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check the wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all operating modes. in the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes , the scan time of the module is doubled, irrespective of the number of channels for which wire break has been enabled. in the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode , the module interrupts processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. in other words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 170 ms. smoothing of the measured values you fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in section 4.6. special characteristic with short-circuit to m or l if you short an input channel to m or l, the module does not suffer any damage. the channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.
analog modules 4-113 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostics you will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-44, on page 4-69. 4.21.2 measuring methods and measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 ? measuring method ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels set the ? measuring method ? parameter for unused channels to ? disabled ? . in this way you shorten the scan time of the module. you must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer to the block diagram, figure 4-32, for the connection). in the ? 4-channel hardware filter ? operating mode, termination is not necessary provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored in this mode. measuring ranges you perform setting of the measuring ranges with the ? measuring range ? parameter in step 7 . table 4-62 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-114 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-62 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 ? bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) ? measuring method and the ? pt 100 climate ? measuring range. you can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . measuring errors with common-mode voltages the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-115 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values the parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the ai 8 ? ? ? pt 100 climate pt 200 climate pt 500 climate pt 1000 climate 155.01 ? 145.01 ? 105.01 ? 60.01 ? 243.1 ? 105.1 ? 240.1
analog modules 4-116 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.22 analog input module sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-117 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-118 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-119 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog value generation (cont ? d) measuring principle integrating operating mode 4 channels, hardware integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel)
analog modules 4-120 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 footnotes to technical specifications 1 open-circuit monitoring in 4 channels, hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds. 2 series-mode rejection in 8 channels, software mode is reduced as follows: 50 hz > 70 db 60 hz > 70 db 400 hz > 80 db 3 the operating limit with internal compensation is derived from: basic error of the analog input for the type of thermocouple used accuracy of the temperature of the internal reference junction ? 200 ? 270 ? 200 ? 150 ? 200 ? 150 ? 200 ? 270 ? 200 ? 150 ? 210 ? 150 ? 150 ? 200 ? 150 ? 200 ? 270 ? 200 ? 200 ? 270 ? 200 ? 50 ? 50 ? compensation to 0 ? is set, the deviation for a type b thermocouple during temperature measurement is 200
analog modules 4-121 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.22.1 commissioning the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . parameter you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. table 4-64 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 ? 32512 ? 32512 to 32511 ? dynamic channel diagnostics
analog modules 4-122 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 4-64 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 tc are arranged in four groups of two. you can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. the table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. you will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an sfc. table 4-65 assignment of channels of the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 .
analog modules 4-123 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 reaction to open thermocouple you can assign parameters to ? overflow ? or ? underflow ? as a function of the process you want to control. you should program ? overflow ? for heat-producing processes. when a thermocouple opens, 7fff h is the value supplied by the module. the control loop then shuts down the production of heat automatically. you should program ? underflow ? for refrigeration processes. when a thermocouple opens, 8000 h is the value supplied by the module. the control loop then shuts down the refrigeration automatically. operating mode the sm 331; ai 8 ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? ? software filter, 8 channels ? ? hardware filter, 4 channels ? the operating mode affects the scan time of the module. high speed update mode with high speed updating, updating of not more than 4 channels is performed in only 10 ms. high speed updating is possible only in ? hardware filter, 4 channels ? mode. in this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. you must only use the channels with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6) on the module.
analog modules 4-124 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 scan time in ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? mode in ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? mode, the module always converts the analog values simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers, followed the channels with odd numbers. the scan time for the module results in: scan time = (t k + t u ) ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode in ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode, analog-to-digital conversion is performed in exactly the same manner as in ? hardware filter, 8 channels ? mode. in other words, the analog values are always converted simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers and then for the channels with odd numbers. the channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference frequency suppression. this relationship is shown in the table that follows. table 4-66 scan times in ? software filter, 8 channels ? mode programmed interference frequency suppression channel scan time* module scan time (all channels) 50 hz 83 ms 166 ms 60 hz 72 ms 144 ms 400 hz 23 ms 46 ms * channel scan time = channel conversion time + 7 ms switching time to the other channel in the channel group scan time in ? hardware filter, 4 channels ? mode in this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. the module converts the channels with even numbers simultaneously. this results for the scan time in: channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms
analog modules 4-125 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check the wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all operating modes. the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes prolong the scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which wire break has been enabled. in the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode , the module interrupts processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. in other words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 93 ms. smoothing of the measured values you fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in section 4.6. special characteristic with short-circuit to m or l if you short an input channel to m or l, the module does not suffer any damage. the channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported. diagnostics you will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-44, on page 4-69.
analog modules 4-126 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.22.2 measuring methods and measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8 ? measuring method ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels set the ? measuring method ? parameter for unused channels to ? disabled ? . in this way you shorten the scan time of the module. you must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel. to do this, short the plus input and minus input of the channel. in the ? 4-channel hardware filter ? operating mode, termination is not necessary provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored in this mode. measuring ranges you perform setting of the measuring ranges with the ? measuring range ? parameter in step 7 . table 4-67 measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8
analog modules 4-127 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 default settings the default settings of the module are the ? thermocouple (linear, internal compensation) ? measuring method and the ? type k ? measuring range. you can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . measuring errors with common-mode voltages the sm 331; ai 8 ? 270.1 ? 210.1 ? 270.1 ? 200.1 ? 270.1 ? 50.1 ? 50.1 ? 270.1 ? 200.1
analog modules 4-128 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.23 analog output module sm 332; ao 4 12 bit; (6es7 332-5hd01-0ab0) order number 6es7 332-5hd01-0ab0 characteristics the analog output module sm 332; ao 4 ? voltage outputs ? current outputs
analog modules 4-129 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module sm 332; ao 4 12 bit current output qi 0 m ana qi 1 m ana qi 2 m ana qi 3 m ana ch0 ch1 ch2 ch3 voltage outputs qv 0 s 0
analog modules 4-130 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 332; ao 4 12 bit dimensions and w eight dimensions w ? and m ana (e cm ) 3 vdc
analog modules 4-131 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data for selecting an actuator output ranges (nominal values) ? capacitive load min. 1 k ? ? at e cm < 1v ? inductive load max. 500 ? ? four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) possible ? two-conductor connection possible 4.23.1 commissioning the sm 332; ao 4 12 bit note when switching on and off the rated load voltage (l+), wrong intermediate values can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms. parameter you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. you will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in table 4-40, on page 4-41.
analog modules 4-132 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 assigning parameters to channels you can configure each output channel of the sm 332; ao 4 ? in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0. note if you modify output ranges when the analog output module sm 332; ao 4 ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-45, on page 4-69. 4.23.2 output ranges of the analog output module sm 332; ao 4 ? output type ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels so that unused output channels of the sm 332; ao 4 ? output type ? parameter to ? disabled ? and leave the terminal open.
analog modules 4-133 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 output ranges you program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in step 7 . table 4-69 output ranges of the analog output module sm 332; ao 4 ? voltage ? for the output type and ? ? for the output range. you can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the sm 332; ao 4 step 7 . wire-break check the analog output module sm 332; ao 4
analog modules 4-134 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.24 analog output module sm 332; ao 2 ? voltage outputs ? current outputs
analog modules 4-135 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the sm 332; ao 2
analog modules 4-136 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 332; ao 2 ? and m ana (e cm) 3 vdc
analog modules 4-137 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data for selecting an actuator output ranges (nominal values) ? capacitive load min. 1 k ? ? at e cm < 1v ? inductive load max. 500 ? ? two-wire circuit ? four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) possible possible ? two-conductor circuit possible 4.24.1 commissioning the sm 332; ao 2
analog modules 4-138 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 assigning parameters to channels you can configure each output channel of the sm 332; ao 2 ? in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0. note if you modify output ranges when the analog output module sm 332; ao 2 ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-45, on page 4-69. 4.24.2 output ranges of the analog output module sm 332; ao 2 ? output type ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels so that unused output channels of the sm 332; ao 2 ? output type ? parameter to ? disabled ? and leave the terminal open.
analog modules 4-139 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 output ranges you program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in step 7 . table 4-70 output ranges of the analog output module sm 332; ao 2 ? voltage ? for the output type and ? ? for the output range. you can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the sm 332; ao 2 step 7 . wire-break check the analog output module sm 332; ao 2
analog modules 4-140 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.25 analog output module sm 332; ao 4 16 bit; (6es7 332-7nd00-0ab0) order number 6es7 332-7nd00-0ab0 characteristics the analog output module sm 332; ao 4 ? voltage outputs ? current outputs ? backplane bus interface and analog output channel ? the different analog output channels ? analog output and l+, m ? backplane bus interface and l+, m
analog modules 4-141 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module sm 332; ao 4 16 bit sf qi 0 galvanic isolation ch0 ch0 current outputs voltage outputs m ana 0 qv 0 s 0 + s 0 ? m ana 0 fault indicator - red qi 1 ch1 ch1 m ana 1 qv 1 s 1 + s 1 ? m ana 1 qi 2 ch2 ch2 m ana 2 qv 2 s 2 + s 2 ? m ana 2 qi 3 ch3 ch3 m ana 3 qv 3 s 3 + s 3 ? m ana 3 l+ 24 v m 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 back- plane bus im figure 4-36 module view and block diagram of the sm 332; ao 4
analog modules 4-142 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 332; ao 4 16 bit dimensions and w eight dimensions w
analog modules 4-143 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data for selecting an actuator output ranges (nominal values) ? capacitive load min. 1 k ? ? inductive load max. 500 ? ? four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) possible ? four-conductor connection possible 4.25.1 commissioning the sm 332; ao 4 16 bit parameter you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. you will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in table 4-40, on page 4-41. assigning parameters to channels you can configure each output channel of the sm 332; ao 4 ? in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0. note if you modify output ranges when the analog output module sm 332; ao 4
analog modules 4-144 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostics you will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the ? group diagnosis ? parameter in table 4-45, on page 4-69. 4.25.2 output ranges of the analog output module sm 332; ao 4 ? output type ? parameter in step 7 . unused channels so that unused output channels of the sm 332; ao 4 ? output type ? parameter to ? disabled ? and leave the terminal open. output ranges you program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in step 7 . table 4-71 output ranges of the analog output module sm 332; ao 4 ? voltage ? for the output type and ? ? for the output range. you can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the sm 332; ao 4 step 7 . substitute values you can configure the sm 332; ao 4
analog modules 4-145 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.26 analog input/output module sm334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-146 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 module view and block diagram of the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-147 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-148 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 interference suppression, error limits for the outputs crosstalk between the outputs > 40 db operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range) ? capacitive load ? inductive load min. 5 k
analog modules 4-149 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.26.1 commissioning the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 8/8 bit the analog/output module sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 x 8/8 bit is a non-isolated module. you cannot program the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-150 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 output addresses the following channel addresses apply to the module outputs: chan- nel address 0 initial module address 1 module start address + 2 bytes address offset 4.26.2 measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 8/8 bit you cannot program the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-151 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.27 analog input/output module sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 ? voltage ? resistors ? temperature
analog modules 4-152 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection and block diagram of the sm334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-153 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm334; ai 4/ao 2
analog modules 4-154 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 interference suppression, error limits for inputs suppression of interference for f = nx (f1
analog modules 4-155 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.27.1 commissioning the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 step 7 v 4.0 the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 step 7 v.4.0 or higher. parameters you will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in section 4.7. you will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in table 4-41, on page 4-42.
analog modules 4-156 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 4.27.2 measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 ? measuring method ? and ? output method ? in step 7 . connection options for the input channels you can connect the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 ? measuring method ? parameter for unused input channels to ? disabled ? . in this way you shorten the scan time of the module. you must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to m ana . in this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. so that unused output channels of the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 ? output type ? parameter to ? disabled ? and leave the terminal open.
analog modules 4-157 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 measuring ranges use step 7 for programming the measuring ranges. table 4-72 measuring ranges of the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 ? bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) ? measuring method and the ? pt 100 climate ? measuring range. you can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 step 7 . output ranges use step 7 for programming the output ranges. table 4-73 output ranges of the sm sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 ? voltage ? for the output type and ? 0 to 10 v ? for the output range. you can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the sm 334; ai4/ao 2 step 7 .
analog modules 4-158 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01
5-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 other signal modules changes and improvements since the previous version of the reference manual a new overview section will make it easier for you to access the information: ? module overview ? section shows you the modules that are available, together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find the module suitable for your task. in this chapter section contents page 5.1 module overview 5-2 5.2 simulator module sm 374; in/out 16; (6es7 374-2xh01-0aa0) 5-3 5.3 dummy module dm 370; (6es7 370-0aa01-0aa0) 5-5 5.4 position detection module sm 338; pos-input; (6es7 338-4bc00-0ab0) 5-7 5
other signal modules 5-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.1 module overview introduction the following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the signal modules described in this chapter. this overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. table 5-1 other signal modules characteristics at a glance module characteristics simulator module sm 374; in/out 16 dummy module dm 370 position detection module sm 338; pos-input number of inputs/outputs
other signal modules 5-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.2 simulator module sm 374; in/out 16; (6es7 374-2xh01-0aa0) order number 6es7 374-2xh01-0aa0 characteristics the simulator module sm 374; in/out 16 has the following salient features: ? 16 inputs or ? 16 outputs or ? 8 inputs and 8 outputs (with the same start addresses each!) step 7 simulator module sm 374; in/out 16 is not included in the module catalog of step 7 . in other words, the order number of sm 374 is not detected by step 7 . you must therefore ? simulate ? the desired function of the simulator module for configuration in the following manner: step 7 ; example: 6es7 321-1bh02-0aa0 step 7 ; example: 6es7 322-1bh01-0aa0 step 7 ; example: 6es7 323-1bh00-0aa0
other signal modules 5-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 module view (without front door) status display ? green channel number switch for input status switch for setting the function figure 5-1 module view of simulator module sm 374; in/out 16 technical specifications of the sm 374; in/out 16 dimensions and w eight dimensions w
other signal modules 5-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.3 dummy module dm 370; (6es7 370-0aa01-0aa0) order number 6es7 370-0aa01-0aa0 characteristics dummy module dm 370 reserves a slot for an unprogrammed module. it can be a dummy for: step 7 use step 7 to configure the dummy module only if you are using the module to reserve the slot for a parameterized signal module. if the module is reserving the slot for an interface module, there is no need to configure with step 7 . modules occupying two slots for modules that occupy two slots, you must plug in two dummy modules. in doing so, you reserve the address area only with the dummy module at slot ? x ? (not with the dummy module at ? x + 1 ? ; for the steps you need to perform refer to table 5-2). not more than 8 modules must be inserted in a mounting rack (sm/fm/cp). if, for example, you reserve one slot for an 80 mm module with two dummy modules, you may only insert seven more modules (sm/fm/cp) since the dummy module only occupies the address area for one module.
other signal modules 5-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 module view front view na a rear view switch for address assignment figure 5-2 module view of dummy module dm 370 switch settings for address assignment the table below shows how you have to set the switch on the back of the module to match the module type. table 5-2 meaning of the switch positions of the dummy module dm 370 switch position meaning use in an et 200m configuration with active bus modules (insert and remove) a na dummy module reserves the slot for an interface module (na = no address, that is no address space reserved) no a na dummy module reserves the slot for a signal module (a = address, that is address space reserved) dummy module reserves the slot for a signal module. if you use the dummy module for an ? empty slot ? , you must configure the ? empty slot ? with 0 bytes input/output addresses.
other signal modules 5-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the dm 370 dimensions and w eight dimensions w
other signal modules 5-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram and block diagram fault indicator - red 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 l+ 24v od (data) od (data) oc (clock) oc (clock) 1d (data) 1d (data) 1c (clock) 1c (clock) 2d (data) 2d (data) 2c (clock) 2c (clock) di 0 (digital di 1 inputs) 24 vdc (enc.) 24 vdc (enc.) m (encoder) m (encoder) ssi ssi ssi short-circuit protection voltage moni- toring sf s7 ? 300 backplane bus logic circuitry m rs 422 twisted-pair lines di 0 di 1 connection to the ground of the cpu figure 5-3 module view and block diagram of the sm 338; pos-input wiring rules be sure to observe the following important rules when wiring the module:
other signal modules 5-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specifications of the sm 338; pos-input dimensions and w eight dimensions w x h x d (mm) 40 ? 0,8v max. 900 ma short circuit-proof current consumption ? 3 v to 5 v 1 signal: 11 v to 30.2 v input current 0 signal:
other signal modules 5-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.4.1 operating principle of the sm 338; pos-input the sm 338 periodically acquires the signals from up to three connected encoders absolute (ssi). example of the operating principle of the sm 338 at an encoder input the following figure illustrates the basic operating principle by means of an encoder input. a 25-bit encoder may be connected to the input, for example. you will find a detailed description of the parameters and addressing in the sections that follow. the encoder signals are read in gray-to-binary converter (parameters can be assigned) normalizing (parameters can be assigned) the encoder value is stored at the input address + the address offset on the sm 338 freeze values (asynchronously to process by means of di 0/di 1) update rate 450 step 7 cyclical process in sm 338 enable the address areas in the output area of the sm 338 freeze encoder values set digital input di 0/di 1 reset (asynchronously to process; parameters can be assigned) figure 5-4 operating principle of the sm 338; pos-input
other signal modules 5-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.4.2 assigning parameters to the sm 338; pos-input tools for parameter assignment you assign parameters to the sm 338; pos-input in step 7 . you must perform parameter assignment in stop mode of the cpu. when you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the cpu. on a transition from stop to run mode, the cpu transfers the parameters to the sm 338. parameter assignment is not possible in the user program all parameters of the sm 338; pos-input are static parameters. in other words, you can assign parameters to the module only as described above with the cpu in stop mode, and not in the user program. parameters of the sm 338; pos-input you will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values for the sm 338 in the table below. the default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in step 7 . table 5-3 parameters of the sm 338; pos-input parameter value range default values para- meter type scope enable
other signal modules 5-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 transmission rate parameter parameterize the transmission rate of the encoders absolute as specified by the encoder manufacturer and in accordance with the length of cable between the encoder and the module: table 5-4 sm 338; pos-input: interrelationship between length of cable and transmission rate maximum length of cable (shielded cable) baud rate 320 m 125 khz 160 m 250 khz 60 m 500 khz 20 m 1 mhz note the transmission rate affects the message frame time of the encoders absolute (ssi). monoflop time parameter the monoflop time is the interval between two ssi message frames. rule: the programmed monoflop time must be greater than the monoflop time of the encoder absolute (refer to the technical specifications of the encoder manufacturer). note encoders absolute with a monoflop time of more than 64
other signal modules 5-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 normalizing of encoder values on account of normalizing, the encoder is right-justified in the address area; irrelevant places are discarded. you parameterize normalizing in step 7 . note when you use an encoder absolute which transfers additional information in the subsequent bits (refer to the manufacturer specifications) and you would like to evaluate this information, you must take this into account in normalizing by specifying the places. steps/revolution parameter the number of irrelevant bit places by which the encoder value must be moved to the right for it to be right-justified is automatically calculated from the number of steps per revolution of the encoder and the sensor type (for example, 13-bit). example of encoder value normalizing you use a single turn encoder with 2 9 steps = 512 steps/revolution (resolution/360 step 7 : ? x ? ) have been excluded.
other signal modules 5-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 enable freeze function with the freeze function, you ? freeze ? the current encoder values of the sm 338. the freeze function is connected to digital inputs di 0 and di 1 of the sm 338. freezing is triggered by transitional edges (rising pulse edge) across di 0 or di 1. a frozen encoder value is identified by the set bit 31 (output address). with one digital input you can freeze one, two or three encoder values. you have to enable the freeze function ? in other words parameterize accordingly in step 7 . the encoder values are retained until the end of the freeze function and can thus be evaluated as a function of the result. terminating the freeze function you have to terminate the freeze function for each encoder input. you acknowledge the function in the user program by resetting bit 31 in the output address with the step 7 operation t pab ? xyz ? (for an example program refer to section 5.4.3). the encoder values are updated again following acknowledgement. the encoder values can be frozen again.
other signal modules 5-15 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.4.3 addressing sm 338; pos-input data areas for the encoder values the inputs and outputs of the sm 338 are addressed as of the initial module address. you determine the input and output addresses during configuration of the sm 338 in step 7 . input addresses table 5-5 sm 338; pos-input: input addresses encoder input input address (from configuration) + address offset 0 ? initial module address ? 1 ? initial module address ? + 4 bytes address offset 2 ? initial module address ? + 8 bytes address offset structure of the data double word the data double word is structured as follows at each encoder input: encoder value in gray code or binary code freeze 0 = encoder value is not frozen. the value is continuously updated. 1 = encoder value is frozen. the value remains the same until acknowledgment. 31 0 output address acknowledgement of the freeze function: bit 0 = encoder input 0 bit 1 = encoder input 1 bit 2 = encoder input 2 initial module address 0 7
other signal modules 5-16 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 reading out data areas you can read out the data area in your user program with the step 7 operation l ped ? xyz ? . example of access to encoder values and use of the freeze function you want to read out and evaluate the value of the encoder at the encoder inputs. the initial module address is 256. stl explanation l ped 256 t md 100 u m 100.7 = m 99.0 l ped 260 t md 104 u m 104.7 = m 99.1 l ped 264 t md 108 u m 108.7 = m 99.2 lmb99 t pab 256 the encoder value in the address area for encoder input 0 is read. the encoder value is stored in the memory double word. determine and store freeze status for acknowledgement later the encoder value in the address area for encoder input 1 is read. the encoder value is stored in the memory double word. determine and store freeze status for acknowledgement later the encoder value in the address area for encoder input 2 is read. the encoder value is stored in the memory double word. determine and store freeze status for acknowledgement later load the freeze status and acknowledge (sm 338: output address 256) afterwards you can further process the encoder values from the bit memory address area md 100, md 104 and md 108. the encoder value is in bits 0 to 30 of the memory double word.
other signal modules 5-17 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.4.4 diagnostics of the sm 338; pos-input programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages in diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. the sm 338 makes non-programmable diagnostic messages available. in other words, all diagnostic messages are provided by the sm 338 without your having to do anything. actions following diagnostic message in step 7 each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: ? enable diagnostic interrupt ? in step 7 , a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and ob 82 is called. reading out diagnostic messages you can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of sfcs in the user program (refer to the appendix ? diagnostic data of signal modules ? ). you can view the cause of the error in step 7 , in the module diagnosis (refer to online help for step 7 ). diagnostic message by means of sf led the sm 338 indicates errors by means of its sf-led (group error led). the sf led lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the sm 338. it goes out when all errors have been rectified. the group fault (sf) led also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the cpu (if power is on). the sf led lights briefly during startup, during the sm 338 self-test.
other signal modules 5-18 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostic messages of the sm 338; pos-input the table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the sm 338; pos-input. table 5-6 diagnostic messages of the sm 338; pos-input diagnostics message led scope of the diagno- stics parameters can be assi- gned module problem sf module no internal malfunction sf module no external malfunction sf module no channel error present sf module no external auxiliary supply missing sf module no module not parameterized. sf module no wrong parameters sf module no channel information available sf module no time monitoring triggered sf module no channel error present sf channel (encoder input) no configuring/parameter assignment error sf channel (encoder input) no external channel error (encoder error) sf channel (encoder input) no
other signal modules 5-19 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 causes of errors and troubleshooting table 5-7 diagnostic messages of the sm 338, causes of errors and troubleshooting diagnostics mes- sage possible error cause remedy module malfunction an error detected by the module has occurred internal error the module has detected an error within the programmable logic controller external error the module has detected an error outside the programmable logic controller channel error present indicates that only certain channels are faulty external auxiliary voltage missing power supply l+ to module missing feed supply l+ module not parameterized the module requires the information as to whether it should work with system default parameters or with your parameters message queued after power-on until parameter transmission by the cou has been completed; parameterize the module, as required wrong parameters one parameter or the combination of parameters is not plausible reassign module parameter channel information present channel error present; the module can supply additional channel information watchdog tripped temporary high electromagnetic interference eliminate interference channel error present an error detected by the module has occurred at the encoder input configuration/paramet erization error illegal parameters transferred to module reassign module parameter external channel error (encoder error) wire break of encoder cable, encoder cable not connected or encoder defective check connected encoder
other signal modules 5-20 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 5.4.5 interrupts of the sm 338; pos-input introduction this section describes the interrupt behavior of the sm 338; pos-input. the sm 338 can trigger diagnostic interrupts. the obs and sfcs mentioned below can be found in the online help for step 7 , where they are described in greater detail. enabling interrupts the interrupts are not preset ? in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. assign parameters to the interrupt enable in step 7 (refer to section 5.4.2). diagnostic interrupt if you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. the cpu interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (ob 82). in the user program, you can call sfc 51 or sfc 59 in ob 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. the diagnostic information is consistent until such time as ob 82 is exited. when ob 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
6-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 interface modules interface modules in this chapter you will find the technical specifications and characteristic features of the interface modules for the s7-300. contents the following interface modules are described in this chapter: section contents page 6.1 module overview 6-2 6.2 interface module im 360; (6es7 360-3aa01-0aa0) 6-3 6.3 interface module im 361; (6es7 361 3ca01-0aa0) 6-5 6.4 interface module im 365; (6es7 365-0ba01-0aa0) 6-7 6
interface modules 6-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 6.1 module overview introduction the following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the interface modules described in this chapter. this overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. table 6-1 interface modules: characteristics at a glance module characteristics interface module im 360 interface module im 361 interface module im 365 suitable for plugging into s7-300 mounting racks
interface modules 6-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 6.2 interface module im 360; (6es7 360-3aa01-0aa0) order number 6es7 360-3aa01-0aa0 characteristics the interface module im 360 has the following characteristic features:
interface modules 6-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 front view figure 6-1 shows the front view of the interface module im 360. front view out sf x1 figure 6-1 front view of the interface module im 360 technical specification the following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module im 360. dimensions and w eight dimensions w
interface modules 6-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 6.3 interface module im 361; (6es7 361 3ca01-0aa0) order number 6es7 361 3ca01-0aa0 characteristics the interface module im 361 has the following characteristic features: ?
interface modules 6-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 front view figure 6-2 shows the front view of the interface module im 361. out in sf 5 vdc x1 x2 m l+ m figure 6-2 front view of the interface module im 361
interface modules 6-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 technical specification the following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module im 361. dimensions and w eight dimensions w
interface modules 6-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 front view figure 6-3 shows the front view of the interface module im 365. in rack 1 in rack 0 im 365 receive im 365 send figure 6-3 front view of the interface module im 365 technical specification the following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module im 365. dimensions and w eight dimensions w
7-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 rs 485 repeater in this chapter in this chapter, you will find a detailed description of the rs 485 repeater. included in the description are: hardware and installation in the chapter ? configuring of an mpi or profibus-dp network ? . in this chapter section contents page 7.1 application and characteristics; (6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0) 7-2 7.2 appearance of the rs-485 repeater; (6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0) 7-3 7.3 rs 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation 7-4 7.4 technical specification 7-6 7
rs 485 repeater 7-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 7.1 application and characteristics; (6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0) order number 6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0 what is an rs 485 repeater? the rs 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus segments. application of the rs 485 repeater you need an rs 485 repeater if:
rs 485 repeater 7-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 7.2 appearance of the rs 485 repeater; (6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0) the table below shows the appearance of the rs 485 repeater and lists its functions. table 7-3 description and functions of the rs 485 repeater repeater design no. function 24 vdc l+ m pe m 5.2 ? m5.2 ? is the ground reference, if you want to measure the voltage difference between terminals ? a2 ? and ? b2 ? ). ? for example, for startup
rs 485 repeater 7-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 7.3 rs 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation grounded or ungrounded the rs 485 repeater is ... ? m ? and ? pe ? on the top of the rs 485 repeater. ungrounded operation of the rs 485 repeater for ungrounded operation of the rs 485 repeater, ? m ? and ? pe ? on the top of the rs 485 repeater must not be interconnected. in addition, the supply voltage of the rs 485 repeater must be ungrounded.
rs 485 repeater 7-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal connection diagram in the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential (ungrounded operation), any interference currents and static charges are discharged by means of an rc network integrated in the repeater (refer to figure 7-1) to the protective conductor. 24 vdc l+ m pe m 5.2 a1 b1 a1 b1 m 22 nf 10 m ? ?
rs 485 repeater 7-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 amplification of the bus signals the amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the pg/op interface and the port for bus segment 2. 7.4 technical specifications technical specifications of the rs 485 repeater technical specification power supply ? ? 2 m24v ground 24 v 5 3 rxd/txd-p data line b 9 4 4 rts request to send 4 8 5 m5v2 data reference potential (from station) 3 7 6 p5v2 supply plus (from station) 2 6 7 p24v 24 v 1 8 rxd/txd-n data line a 9 ? ?
rs 485 repeater 7-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 block diagram of the rs 485 repeater ? between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 ? between pg/op socket and bus segment 2 5v 24v segment 2 a2 b2 a2 b2 segment 1 a1 b1 a1 b1 pg/op- socket l+ (24 v) m a1 b1 5 v m5 v l+ (24 v) m pe m 5.2 logic 5v 24v 1m 1m figure 7-3 block diagram of the rs 485 repeater
rs 485 repeater 7-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01
8-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa changes and modifications compared with the previous version of the reference manual the descriptions of simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa are summarized in this chapter. in this way it was possible to extract and give precedence to generally valid information. a new overview section will make it easier for you to access the information. the section entitled ?module overview? shows the basic configuration of simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa. in addition, you will also find out which modules in the s7-300 family can be used with simatic top connect/... tpa. in this chapter section contents page 8.1 module overview 8-2 8.2 wiring components 8-4 8.3 wiring simatic top connect with digital modules 8-12 8.4 wiring simatic top connect tpa with analog modules 8-20 structure of the chapter sections 8.1 and 8.2 apply to simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa. section 8.3 contains specific information on simatic top connect and thus supplements the preceding sections. section 8.4 contains specific information on simatic top connect tpa and thus supplements sections 8.1 and 8.2. 8
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.1 module overview introduction ? simatic top connect ? denotes components for wiring digital modules. ? simatic top connect tpa ? denotes components for wiring analog modules. wiring wiring with simatic top connect/... tpa is an elegant alternative to conventional wiring of the actuators and sensors directly at the front connector of the module. when using these components, you wire actuators and sensors ? in situ ? on one more terminal blocks. you establish the connection to the module by means of a connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable). configuration of simatic top connect with a s7-300 a simatic top connect and a simatic top connect tpa always consist of: a front connector module with flat ribbon connection , one or more terminal blocks and one or more connecting cables with plug-and-socket connectors at ends figure 8-1 simatic top connect on a s7-300
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 advantages use of simatic top connect/... tpa features the following advantages: fast, low-cost wiring (the use of central terminal blocks is no longer necessary) simple mounting of the components (front connector module, connecting cable, terminal block) each component can be replaced separately connecting cable configurable without waste wiring errors are drastically reduced neat and tidy cabinet wiring the supply voltage for the module can be connected to components of simatic top connect/... tpa simplification of the terminals for m- and l+ connection range of modules the table below lists all the modules which you can wire with simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa. you will find a detailed list of the components of simatic top connect/... tpa with their order numbers in table 8-5 on page 8-12 and table 8-13 on page 8-20. table 8-1 simatic top connect/... tpa: connectable modules component front view of terminal block wiring possible with module... simatic top connect sm 321; di 32 24 vdc sm 321; di 16 24 vdc sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; source input sm 322; do 32 24 vdc/0.5 a sm 322; do 16 24 vdc/0.5 a sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a; with diagnostic interrupt sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/2 a sm 323; di 16/do 16 24 vdc/0.5 a sm 323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a simatic top connect tpa sm 331; ai 2 12 bit sm 331; ai 8 12 bit connect tpa abcdefgh i k sm 332; ao 4 12 bit sm 332; ao 2 12 bit sm 332; ao 4 16 bit yykkaaaazz y z sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 8/8 bit sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 12 bit sm 335; ai 4/ao 4 14 bit;
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.2 wiring components introduction the following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission simatic top connect/... tpa successfully. the sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner or later. sequence of steps for wiring table 8-2 sequence of steps for wiring simatic top connect/... tpa step procedure refer to section... 1. cut connecting cable to length and terminate 8.2.1 2. wire the front connector module 8.2.2 and 8.3 or 8.4 3. connect the connecting cable to the terminal block 8.2.3 and 8.3 or 8.4 4. wire actuators/sensors to the terminal block 8.2.4 8.2.1 cut the connecting cable to length and terminate maximum length of cable the length of the connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable) between the simatic s7 and the terminal blocks must not be more than 30 m. using the connectors you must attach connectors to either end of the round-sheath ribbon cable, for connection to the front connector module and the terminal block. connect the round-sheath ribbon cable to connector 1. cut the round-sheath ribbon cable to the length required and remove part of the cable sheath at both ends. you will find the length of the cable sheath that has to be removed in the following table:
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 cable sheath to be removed outer ribbon cable inner ribbon cabel outer ribbon cable inner ribbon cable cable end to ... 20-pin front connec- tor 40-pin front connec- tor 20-pin front connector 40-pin front connector ... top connector of front connector module 1 x 16 cores 110 mm 115 mm ... bottom connector of front connector module shielded/uns hielded 70 mm 75 mm ... top connector of front connector module 95 mm 115 mm ... bottom connector of front connector module 2 x 16 cores unshielded 95 mm 115 mm 40 mm 75 mm ... socket of terminal block 40 mm 100 mm 2. thread the cable into the 16-pin connector. it is important that you note the position of the details marked in the following figure. triangle nose marked core figure 8-2 threading the round-sheath ribbon cable into the connector 3. clamp the end of the cable into the connector with the crimping tool. 4. attach the strain relief device to the connector of the terminal block as follows: ? fold back the cable over the connector ? push the enclosed strain relief device over the cable ? snap the strain relief device into place on the connector
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.2.2 wiring the front connector module introduction this chapter describes the principle of wiring the front connector modules. note also the special sections for simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa (section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). in those sections, you will find, among other things, selection criteria for the front connector modules and specific connection examples. using the front connector module you require the front connector module to connect the connecting cable to the module. in addition, you can connect the supply voltage of the module to the front connector module.
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage the following table shows you what you have to consider when connecting the module supply voltage to the terminal block or front connector module. the terminals for the supply voltage are screws or spring-loaded terminals (refer to section 8.2.4 for handling spring-loaded terminals). table 8-3 wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage rules for ... terminal block front connector spring-loaded connection screw-type connection up to 4 terminals up to 8 terminals conductor cross-sections suitable for connection: solid conductors no no no stranded conductors without end ferrules with end ferrules 0.25 to 1.5 mm 2 0.25 to 1.5 mm 2 0.25 to 1.5 mm 2 0.25 to 1.5 mm 2 0.25 to 0.75 mm 2 0.25 to 0.75 mm 2 no of conductors per terminal 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm 2 (sum) in a common end ferrule max. diameter of conductor insulation ? 3.1 mm ? 3.1 mm ? 2.0 mm length of conductor insulation to be stripped without insulation collar with insulation collar 11 mm 11 mm 6 mm ? end ferrules to din 46228 without insulation collar with insulation collar ? 0.25 to 1.0 mm 2 ? 1.5 mm 2 model a; up to 12 mm long model e; up to 12 mm long model e; 12 mm long model a; up to 12 mm long model e; up to 12 mm long model e; 18 mm long model a; 5 to 7 mm long ?
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connect the connecting cable and the supply voltage to the front connector module 1. open the front door of the module. 2. bring the front connector into the wiring position. 3. if necessary, connect the cables for the incoming supply of the module supply voltage. 4. insert the connecting cable into the front connector module as shown in the following figure: figure 8-3 inserting the connecting cable into the front connector module 5. twist every connecting cable 90 downwards and turn through one whole turn to the extent possible. additional steps for wiring for 32-channel digital modules note when using 32-channel digital modules, you must observe the assignment of the supply connections to the connecting cable terminals and the assignment of the connecting cable terminals to the address bytes of the module (refer to figure 8-4 and table 8-4). 6. thread a strain relief assembly into the middle of the front connector. this strain relief assembly is used to fix the connecting cables in the narrow cable stowage area of the module. 7. thread the strain relief assembly into the front connector.
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 front connector module for 32-channel digital modules the following figure shows the front view of the front connector module for 32-channel digital modules. + _ + _ + _ + _ supply terminals for supply terminals for supply terminals for supply terminals for openings for strain relief to : terminals for connecting cable; refer to table 8-4 for the address assignment opening for the screwdriver opening for the cable to be connected legend: figure 8-4 front connector module for 32-channel digital modules assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital modules table 8-4 assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital modules refer to address assignment for figure 8-4: connecting cable terminal digital input module digital output module digital input/output module ib x qb x ib x ib (x+1) qb (x+1) ib (x+1) ib (x+2) qb (x+2) qb x ib (x+3) qb (x+3) qb (x+1)
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.2.3 connecting the connecting cable to the terminal block introduction a description of how to mount the terminal blocks is presented in the following. note also the special sections for simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa (section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). in those sections, you will find, among other things, selection criteria for the different terminal blocks and specific connection examples. mounting the terminal block and connecting cable 1. attach the terminal block to a 35 mm standard rail in accordance with en 50 022. 2. insert the connecting cable into the terminal block as shown in the following figure: figure 8-5 insert the connecting cable into the terminal block 8.2.4 wiring actuators/sensors to the terminal block screw-type or spring-loaded terminals to mount the signal leads of the actuators/sensors to the terminal block and the supply lines to the terminal block and front connector module, you can choose between screw-type and spring-loaded components. the principle of spring-loaded components is dealt with in greater detail in the following, since it allows fast and simple connection of the signal lines and supply cables.
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 spring-loaded terminal block opening for the screwdriver for pressing the spring-loaded contact opening for the cable to be connected figure 8-6 spring-loaded terminal block ! caution the spring-loaded contact will be damaged, if you insert the screwdriver into the opening for the cable. make sure that you insert the screwdriver only into the rectangular opening of the terminal block. attaching the cable to the spring-loaded contact attach the cables to the spring-loaded contacts as follows: 1. use a screwdriver to press down the spring-loaded terminal in the rectangular opening and to hold it down. 2. insert the cable into the round opening of the corresponding spring-loaded terminal as far as it will go. 3. remove the screwdriver from the spring-loaded terminal. the cable is held by the spring-loaded contact. figure 8-7 principle of spring-loaded connections
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.3 wiring simatic top connect with digital modules introduction for wiring the module with actuators/sensors using simatic top connect, you must first select the components as a function of the module and method of connection (screw-type or spring-loaded terminal, one-conductor, three-conductor or 2a connection; relay). 8.3.1 simatic top connect components and selection aid components the following table contains all the component of simatic top connect. table 8-5 components of simatic top connect components of simatic top connect order number terminal block ... for one-conductor connection spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 924-0aa00-0ab0 6es7 924-0aa00-0aa0 ... for one-conductor connection (10 items) spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 924-0aa00-1ab0 6es7 924-0aa00-1aa0 ... for three-conductor connection spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 924-0ca00-0ab0 6es7 924-0ca00-0aa0 ... for three-conductor connection (10 items) spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 924-0ca00-1ab0 6es7 924-0ca00-1aa0 ... for 2a modules spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 924-0bb00-0ab0 6es7 924-0bb00-0aa0 ... for 2a modules (10 items) spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 924-0bb00-1ab0 6es7 924-0bb00-1aa0 ... for relay spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 924-0cd00-0ab0 6es7 924-0cd00-0aa0 front connector for 32-channel modules (refer to figure 8-4) voltage supply via: spring-loaded terminals 6es7 921 3aa20-0aa0 for 16-channel modules voltage supply via: spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 921-3aa00-0aa0 6es7 921-3ab00-0aa0 for 16-channel 2a modules voltage supply via: spring-loaded screw-type 6es7 921-3ac00-0aa0 6es7 921-3ad00-0aa0 connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement connectors) 6es7 921-3be10-0aa0
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table 8-5 components of simatic top connect, continued components of simatic top connect order number round-sheath ribbon cable unshielded 30 m 60 m 6es7 923-0cd00-0aa0 6es7 923-0cg00-0aa0 1x 16 shielded 30 m 60 m 6es7 923-0cd00-0ba0 6es7 923-0cg00-0ba0 round-sheath ribbon cable 2 x 16 unshielded 30 m 60 m 6es7 923-2cd00-0aa0 6es7 923-2cg00-0aa0 crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6es7 928-0aa00-0aa0 selection aid in the following table you will find the components of simatic top connect with which you can wire the digital modules. table 8-6 selection table for simatic top connect components digital modules terminal block for... front connector module for... one- conductor connection three- conductor connection 2a modules relay sm; 16 or 32 channels 2a modules sm 321; di 32 24 vdc ? ? ? sm 321; di 16 24 vdc ? ? ? sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; source input ? ? ? sm 322; do 32 24 vdc/0.5 v ? ? sm 322; do 16 24 vdc/0.5 v ? ? sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/0.5 v; with diagnostic interrupt ? ? ? sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/2 a ? ? ? ? sm 323; di 16 / do 16 24 vdc/ 0.5 a ? ? ? sm323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a ? ? ? one-conductor or three-conductor connection with the three-conductor connection, you can optionally apply the supply voltage for the module to the front connector module or to the terminal block. with the one-conductor connection, this can only be done to the front connector module.
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 2a module connection you require the following information on wiring 2a modules only when you want to use the sm 322; 8 do 24 vdc/2 a with simatic top connect. 8.3.2 wiring the module with terminal block for one-conductor connection connection notes table 8-7 connection notes for simatic top connect with one-conductor connection digital modules connection notes supply voltage feed-in additional descrip- at front connector only add. ground conn. at terminal block at front connector or terminal block jumper required at power supply tion on ter- minal block not in line with description on sm sm 321; di 32 24 vdc ? ? ? ? sm 321; di 16 24 vdc ? ? ? ? sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; source input ? ? ? ? sm 322; do 32 24 vdc/0.5 a ? ? ? ? sm 322; do 16 24 vdc/0.5 a ? ? ? ? sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a; with diagnostic interrupt ? ? ? sm 323; di 16/do 16 24 vdc/0.5 a ? ? ? ? sm 323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/ 0.5 a ? ? ? ?
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-15 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection table 8-8 terminal assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection front view of terminal block assignments of the terminals top row: terminals 0 to 7: inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7 connecting the power supply always connect the supply voltage to the front connector module observe the wiring rules in table 8-3 on page 8-7. in the following example, you must connect l+ to plus of the upper terminal and m to minus of the lower terminal. connecting the terminal block for one-conductor connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 front connector module ? + 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 l+ m ? + terminal block terminal block figure 8-8 wiring a digital module with terminal block for a one-conductor connection
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-16 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.3.3 wiring the module with terminal block for three-conductor connection connection notes table 8-9 connection notes for simatic top connect with three-conductor connection digital modules connection notes supply voltage feed-in additional descrip- at front connector only add. ground conn. at terminal block at front connector or terminal block jumper required at power supply tion on ter- minal block not in line with description on sm sm 321; di 32 24 vdc ? ? ? sm 321; di 16 24 vdc ? ? ? sm 321; di 16 24 vdc; source input ? ? ? sm 322; do 32 24 vdc/0.5 a ? ? ? ? sm 322; do 16 24 vdc/0.5 a ? ? ? ? sm 322; do 8 24 vdc/0.5 a with diagnostic interrupt ? ? sm 323; di 16/do 16 24 vdc/0.5 a ? ? ? ? sm 323; di 8/do 8 24 vdc/ 0.5 a ? ? ? ? assignment of the terminal block for three-conductor connection table 8-10 terminal assignments of the terminal block for three-conductor connection front view of terminal block assignments of the terminals top row: terminals 0to 7:inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7 center row: all terminals: m potential bottom row: all terminals: l + potential
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-17 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting the power supply observe the wiring rules in table 8-3 on page 8-7. with some digital modules, two jumpers are generally required for connecting the supply voltage (refer to table 8-9 on page 8-16). you can wire the jumpers either in the front connector or in the terminal block. irrespective of this, you must interconnect the two plus terminals and the two minus terminals. connecting the terminal block for three-conductor connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 front connector terminal block ? + 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 l+ m ? + terminal block jumper (2) jumper (1) jumper (1) or jumper (2) required figure 8-9 wiring a digital module with terminal block for a three-conductor connection
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-18 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.3.4 wiring the module with terminal block for 2a modules you can use the terminal block for 2a modules to wire the sm 322; 8 do 24 vdc/2a. connection notes table 8-11 connection notes for simatic top connect with 2a module connection digital modules connection notes supply voltage feed-in add. descr. on at front connector only add. ground conn. at terminal block at front connector or terminal block jumper required for power supply terminal block not in line with descr. on sm sm 322; do 16 24 vdc/2 a ? ? ? assignment of the terminal block for connection of 2a modules table 8-12 terminal assignments of the terminal block for 2a modules front view of terminal block assignments of the terminals (left) assignments of the terminals (right) top row: terminals 0 to 3: outputs x.0 to x.3 top row, on right: terminals 0 to 3: outputs x.4 to x.7 center row: terminals 0 to 3: potential m1 for x.0 to x.3 center row, on right: terminals 0 to 3: potential m2 for x.4 to x.7 m1 m2 bottom row: two-terminal connection for m1 bottom row: two-terminal connection for m2
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-19 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 connecting the power supply please observe the following when connecting the power supply: apply the wiring rules in table 8-3 on page 8-7. connect the supply voltage at the front connector module to the potential terminals using separate cables. you must equip each terminal block with a cable for m1 or m2, in addition to the connecting cable. connect m1 or m2 via a separate line with the front connector and the terminal block. you may jumper the potential of m1 and m2. connection to terminal block for 2a modules front connector ? + 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 l+ 2 m ? + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 m 2 l+ terminal block m 1 m 2 figure 8-10 wiring with terminal block for 2a module
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-20 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.4 wiring simatic top connect tpa with analog modules introduction for wiring the module with actuators/sensors using simatic top connect tpa, you must first select the components as a function of the method of connection (screw-type or spring-loaded terminal). 8.4.1 simatic top connect tpa components and selection aid components the following table contains all the component of simatic top connect tpa. table 8-13 components for simatic top connect tpa components of simatic top connect tpa order number terminal block quantity: 1 spring-loaded terminals screw-type terminals 6es7 924-0cc00-0ab0 6es7 924-0cc00-0aa0 quantity: 10 spring-loaded terminals screw-type terminals 6es7 924-0cc00-1ab0 6es7 924-0cc00-1aa0 front connector voltage supply via: spring-loaded terminals screw-type terminals 6es7 921-3af00-0aa0 6es7 921-3ag00-0aa0 connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement connectors) 6es7 921-3be10-0aa0 shielding plate for terminal block, set of 4 6es7 928-1ba00-0aa0 terminal element for: 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6es7 390-5ab00-0aa0 6es7 390-5ba00-0aa0 6es7 390-5ca00-0aa0 round-sheath ribbon cable, shielded ? 8 mm 30 m 60 m 6es7 923-0cd00-0ba0 6es7 923-0cg00-0ba0 crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6es7 928-0aa00-0aa0
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-21 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.4.2 simatic top connect tpa terminal assignment and terminal allocation terminal marking on the tpa terminal block, the terminals are identified by letters. this simplifies the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to the terminals on the terminal block. terminal block assignment table 8-14 terminal assignment of the terminal block of simatic top connect tpa front view of terminal block assignments of the terminals terminals z and y can be used for multiplying arbitrary potentials and signals. abcdefgh i k yykkaaaazz y z the terminals having identical letters are electrically interconnected, with the exception of terminals z and z, and also y and y. multiplier terminal the lower tier of terminals on the terminal block is designed as 2 5 multiplier terminals.
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-22 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 terminal allocation of an analog module to simatic top connect tpa terminal number on module terminal assignment on terminal block tpa terminal block 1 terminal block 2 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 y b c d e f g h i k a z y k b a c d e f g h i z 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 figure 8-11 terminal assignment of analog module to simatic top connect tpa
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-23 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.4.3 connecting the signal-line shield two options for connecting the shield you can connect the signal line shield to ground as follows: on the analog module by means of a shield-support element (refer to the manual hardware and installation for the s7-300 or the manual distributed i/o device et 200m in the section on wiring) directly to the terminal block by means of a shielding plate connecting the shield to the terminal block using a shielding plate 1. before mounting, attach a shielding plate to the terminal block. 2. mount the terminal block on the din rail. (in the figure below, you can see that the shielding plate is applied to the rear of the terminal block and thus there is a connection to the grounded rail.) 3. place the signal-line shield with the shield terminals on the shielding plate. shield support for shield terminal and connecting cable to analog module terminal block shield support fro shield terminal and signal lines from actuators/sensors shielding plate snap the shielding plate into place at the rear of the terminal block. loosen shielding plate snap the shielding plate into place press down lightly on the release to loosen the shielding plate figure 8-12 simatic top connect tpa terminal block with shielding plate
simatic top connect and simatic top connect tpa 8-24 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 8.4.4 connection example connecting the load voltage supply you can connect the load voltage supply of the analog module to the front connector module. their are separate terminals on the front connector module for the load voltage l+ und m. observe the wiring rules in table 8-3 on page 8-7. allocation of front connector to terminal block the upper socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal block 1 and the lower socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal block 2 . connection example the illustration below shows an example of connecting the analog input module sm 321; ai 8 12 bit in ? resistance test ? mode. comp ? / mana resistance test comp + sf m l+ m 0 + ch0 m 0 i c0 + i c0 m 1 + ch2 m 1 i c1 + i c1 m 2 + ch4 m 2 i c2 + i c2 m 3 + ch6 m 3 i c3 + i c3 comp m l + m terminal assignment on terminal block tpa terminal block 1 terminal block 2 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 y b c d e f g h i k a z y k b a c d e f g h i z 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 terminal number on module figure 8-13 example of connecting simatic top connect tpa to sm 321; ai 8 12 bit
a-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 parameter sets for signal modules in this chapter section contents page a.1 how to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program a-1 a.2 parameters of the digital input modules a-3 a.3 parameters of the digital output modules a-5 a.4 parameters of the analog input modules a-7 a.5 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 . in the user program, you can use a sfc: m7-api software to the signal modules in the user program (refer to system software manuals for m7-300/400 ). a
parameter sets for signal modules a-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 parameters stored in data records the parameters of the signal modules are located in data records 0 and 1; for some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well. modifiable parameters you can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module using sfc 55. the parameters set on the cpu are not changed when you do this! you cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program. sfcs for parameter assignment the following sfcs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in the user program: table a-1 sfcs for assigning parameters to signal modules sfc no. identifier application 55 wr_parm transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28) to the addressed signal module. 56 wr_dparm transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the cpu to the addressed signal module. 57 parm_mod transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128) from the cpu to the addressed signal module. description of the parameters the following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module classes. the parameters of the signal modules are described: step 7 step 7 manuals.
parameter sets for signal modules a-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 a.2 parameters of the digital input modules parameters the table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules. you will see which parameters you can modify from the list: step 7 ? wr_parm ? the parameters set with step 7 can also be transferred with sfcs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the step 7 manuals). table a-2 parameters of the digital input modules parameter data record no. parameters can be assigned with ... ... sfc 55 ... programming device input delay no yes diagnostics 0 no yes hardware interrupt enable yes yes diagnostics interrupt enable yes yes hardware interrupt with rising edge 1 yes yes hardware interrupt with falling edge yes yes note if you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using step 7 .
parameter sets for signal modules a-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data record 1 structure the figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital input modules. you activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to ? 1 ? . byte 0 76 0 hardware interrupt enable diagnostics interrupt enable byte 1 76 0 on rising edge at channel group 0 on falling edge at channel group 0 on rising edge at channel group 1 on falling edge at channel group 1 on rising edge at channel group 2 on falling edge at channel group 2 on rising edge at channel group 3 on falling edge at channel group 3 54321 byte 2 76 0 on rising edge at channel group 4 on falling edge at channel group 4 on rising edge at channel group 5 on falling edge at channel group 5 on rising edge at channel group 6 on falling edge at channel group 6 on rising edge at channel group 7 on falling edge at channel group 7 54321 byte 3 not relevant hardware interrupt hardware interrupt figure a-1 data record 1 for parameters of the digital input modules
parameter sets for signal modules a-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 a.3 parameters of the digital output modules parameters the table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules. you will see which parameters you can modify from the list: step 7 ? wr_parm ? the parameters set with step 7 can also be transferred with sfcs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the step 7 manuals). table a-3 parameters of the digital output modules parameter data record no. parameters can be assigned with ... ... sfc 55 ... programming device diagnostics 0 no yes diagnostics interrupt enable yes yes behavior on cpu stop 1 yes yes enable substitute value ? 1 ? yes yes note if you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using step 7 .
parameter sets for signal modules a-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data record 1 structure the figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital output modules. you activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to ? 1 ? . byte 0 76 0 1 hold last valid value apply substitute value diagnostics interrupt enable byte 3 not relevant byte 1 76 0 54321 byte 2 76 0 enable substitute value 1 on channel 15 54321 substitute value substitute value enable substitute value 1 on channel 7 enable substitute value 1 on channel 6 enable substitute value 1 on channel 5 enable substitute value 1 on channel 4 enable substitute value 1 on channel 3 enable substitute value 1 on channel 2 enable substitute value 1 on channel 1 enable substitute value 1 on channel 0 enable substitute value 1 on channel 8 enable substitute value 1 on channel 9 enable substitute value 1 on channel 10 enable substitute value 1 on channel 11 enable substitute value 1 on channel 12 enable substitute value 1 on channel 13 enable substitute value 1 on channel 14 behavior on cpu stop figure a-2 data record 1 for parameters of the digital output modules note you should only enable the parameters in byte 0, ? hold last valid value ? and ? enable substitute value ? as an alternative.
parameter sets for signal modules a-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 a.4 parameters of the analog input modules parameters the table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input modules. you will see which parameters you can modify from the list: step 7 ? wr_parm ? the parameters set with step 7 can also be transferred with sfcs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the step 7 manuals). table a-4 parameters of the analog input modules parameter data record no. parameters can be assigned with ... ... sfc 55 ... programming device diagnostics: group diagnostics no yes diagnostics: with wire-break check no yes temperature unit 0 no yes temperature coefficient no yes smoothing no yes diagnostics interrupt enable yes yes limit value interrupt enable yes yes cycle end interrupt enable yes yes interference suppression yes yes measuring method 1 yes yes measuring range yes yes upper limit value yes yes lower limit value yes yes note if you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using step 7 .
parameter sets for signal modules a-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data record 1 structure the figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input modules. you activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to ? 1 ? . byte 0 76 0 diagnostics interrupt enable limit value interrupt enable byte 1 channel group 0 channel group 1 channel group 3 channel group 2 interference suppression byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 70 43 measurement channel group 0 measurement channel group 2 measurement channel group 1 measurement channel group 3 measuring range measuring method upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 low-order byte low-order byte low-order byte low-order byte high-order byte high-order byte high-order byte high-order byte byte 6 byte 7 byte 8 byte 9 byte 10 byte 11 byte 12 byte 13 see table a-6 see table a-5 note : for the channel groups, only one limit value for channel 1 is ever set. cycle end interrupt enable 2 figure a-3 data record 1 for parameters of the analog input modules note the representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see chapter 4). please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.
parameter sets for signal modules a-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 interference frequency suppression the table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to figure a-3). you must count the resulting integration time separately for each channel! table a-5 codes for interference suppression of the analog input modules interference suppression integration time code 400 hz 2.5 ms 2#00 60 hz 16.7 ms 2#01 50 hz 20 ms 2#10 10 hz 100 ms 2#11 measuring methods and measuring ranges the table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the analog input modules and their codes. you must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to figure a-3). note please note that a measuring range module may need to be reconnected, depending on the measuring range (see chapter 4)! table a-6 codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input modules measuring method code measuring range code deactivated 2#0000 deactivated 2#0000 voltage 2#0001
parameter sets for signal modules a-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table a-6 codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input modules, continued measuring method code measuring range code four-wire transducer 2#0010 ? ptrh] type n [nicrsi ? nisi] type e [nicr ? cuni] 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 thermocouples external comparison 2#1011 type r [ptrh ? pt] type s [ptrh ? pt] type j [fe ? cuni iec] 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 thermocouples + linearization internal comparison 2#1101 type l [fe ? cuni] type t [cu ? cuni] type k [nicr ? ni] type u [cu ? cu ni] 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 thermocouples + linearization external comparison 2#1110
parameter sets for signal modules a-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 a.5 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 ? wr_parm ? the parameters set with step 7 can also be transferred with sfcs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the step 7 manuals). table a-7 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 .
parameter sets for signal modules a-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 structure of data record 1 the figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for sm 331; ai 8 ? 1 ? . byte 0 76 0 diagnostics interrupt enable limit value interrupt enable bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned cycle end interrupt enable 2 temperature unit 0: degrees celsius 1: degrees fahrenheit figure a-4 data record 1 of the parameters for sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 structure of data record 128 the figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 byte 8 measuring method, channel group 2 (refer to table a-10) byte 9 measuring range, channel group 2 (refer to table a-10) byte 10 temperature coefficient, channel group 2 (refer to table a-11) byte 11 measuring method, channel group 3 (refer to table a-10) smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to table a-12) byte 12 measuring range, channel group 3 (refer to table a-10) byte 13 smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to table a-12) temperature coefficient, channel group 3 (refer to table a-11) byte 14 byte 15 byte 16 byte 17 high byte byte 18 byte 19 byte 20 byte 21 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 upper limit value channel group 0; channel 1 lower limit value channel group 0; channel 1 figure a-6 data record 128 of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-15 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 byte 38 byte 39 byte 40 byte 41 high byte byte 42 byte 43 byte 44 byte 45 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 3; channel 6 lower limit value channel group 3; channel 6 upper limit value channel group 3; channel 7 lower limit value channel group 3; channel 7 byte 22 byte 23 byte 24 byte 25 high byte byte 26 byte 27 byte 28 byte 29 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 upper limit value channel group 1; channel 3 lower limit value channel group 1; channel 3 lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 byte 30 byte 31 byte 32 byte 33 high byte byte 34 byte 35 byte 36 byte 37 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 2; channel 4 lower limit value channel group 2; channel 4 upper limit value channel group 2 channel 5 lower limit value channel group 2; channel 5 figure a-7 data record 128 of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-16 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 operating modes of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-17 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table a-10 codes for the measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-18 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 bulb resistor temperature coefficient of the sm 331; ai 8 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
parameter sets for signal modules a-19 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 a.6 parameters der sm 331; ai 8 step 7 ? wr_parm ? the parameters set with step 7 can also be transferred with sfcs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the step 7 manuals). table a-13 parameters of the sm 331; ai 8 step 7 .
parameter sets for signal modules a-20 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 structure of data record 1 the figure below shows the structure of data record 1 of the sm 331; ai 8 ? 1 ? . byte 0 76 0 diagnostics interrupt enable limit value interrupt enable bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned cycle end interrupt enable 2 temperature unit 0: degrees celsius 1: degrees fahrenheit figure a-8 data record 1 of the parameters for sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-21 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 structure of data record 128 the figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-22 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 byte 8 measuring method, channel group 2 (refer to table a-16) byte 9 measuring range, channel group 2 (refer to table a-16) byte 10 byte 11 measuring method, channel group 3 (refer to table a-16) byte 12 measuring range, channel group 3 (refer to table a-16) byte 13 byte 14 byte 15 byte 16 byte 17 high byte byte 18 byte 19 byte 20 byte 21 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 upper limit value channel group 0; channel 1 lower limit value channel group 0; channel 1 reaction to open thermocouple, channel group 2 (refer to table a-17) smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to table a-18) reaction to open thermocouple, channel group 3 (refer to table a-17) smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to table a-18) figure a-10 data record 128 of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-23 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 byte 38 byte 39 byte 40 byte 41 high byte byte 42 byte 43 byte 44 byte 45 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 3; channel 6 lower limit value channel group 3; channel 6 upper limit value channel group 3; channel 7 lower limit value channel group 3; channel 7 byte 22 byte 23 byte 24 byte 25 high byte byte 26 byte 27 byte 28 byte 29 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 upper limit value channel group 1; channel 3 lower limit value channel group 1; channel 3 lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 byte 30 byte 31 byte 32 byte 33 high byte byte 34 byte 35 byte 36 byte 37 high byte low byte low byte high byte high byte low byte low byte upper limit value channel group 2; channel 4 lower limit value channel group 2; channel 4 upper limit value channel group 2 channel 5 lower limit value channel group 2; channel 5 figure a-11 data record 128 of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-24 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 operating modes of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-25 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 measuring methods and measuring ranges of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-26 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 reaction to open thermocouple of the sm 331; ai 8
parameter sets for signal modules a-27 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 a.7 parameters of the analog output modules parameters table a-19 contains all the parameters you can set for analog output modules.. the comparison shows: step 7 and ? wr_parm ? . the parameters which you set with step 7 can also be transferred to the module with sfcs 56 and 57. table a-19 parameters of the analog output modules parameter data record no. parameters can be assigned with ... ... sfc 55 ... programming device diagnostics: group diagnostics 0 no yes diagnostics interrupt enable yes yes behavior on cpu stop yes yes output type 1 yes yes output range yes yes substitute value yes yes note if you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using step 7 .
parameter sets for signal modules a-28 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 data record 1 structure the figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog output modules. you activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to ? 1 ? . byte 0 76 0 byte 1 channel group 0 channel group 1 channel group 3 channel group 2 behavior on cpu stop byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 70 43 output channel group 0 output channel group 2 output channel group 1 output channel group 3 output range output type substitute value channel group 0 substitute value channel group 1 substitute value channel group 2 substitute value channel group 3 low-order byte low-order byte low-order byte low-order byte high-order byte high-order byte high-order byte high-order byte byte 6 byte 7 byte 8 byte 9 byte 10 byte 11 byte 12 byte 13 70 321 diagnostics interrupt enable refer to table a-20 0 = outputs de-energized 1 = hold last value figure a-12 data record 1 for parameters of the analog output modules
parameter sets for signal modules a-29 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 setting substitute values note for output ranges 4 to 20 ma and 1 to 5 v you must set the substitute value e500 h so that the output remains de-energized (refer to tables 4-33 and 4-35 on pages 4-25 and 4-26). the representation of the substitute values corresponds to the analog value representation. you should observe the relevant range limits when setting the substitute values. output methods and output ranges the table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog output modules and their codes. you must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to figure a-12). table a-20 codes for the output ranges of the analog output modules output type code output range code deactivated 2#0000 deactivated 2#0000 voltage 2#0001 1 to 5 v 0 to 10 v
parameter sets for signal modules a-30 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 a.8 parameters of the analog input/output modules parameters the table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input/output modules. you will see which parameters you can modify from the list: step 7 ? wr_parm ? the parameters set with step 7 can also be transferred with sfcs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the step 7 manuals). table a-21 parameters of the analog input/output modules parameter data record no. parameters can be assigned with ... ... sfc 55 ... programming device measuring method yes yes measuring range yes yes integration time 1 yes yes output type yes yes output range yes yes
parameter sets for signal modules a-31 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 structure of data record 1 the figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input/output modules. you activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to ? 1 ? . byte 0 70 byte 1 channel 0 channel 1 channel 3 channel 2 reset time byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 70 43 meas. channel 0 meas. channel 2 meas. channel 1 meas. channel 3 measuring range measuring method 70 not relevant : byte 8 : byte 13 byte 6 byte 7 70 43 output channel 0 output channel 1 output range output type set the same parameters for all channels. not relevant figure a-13 data record 1 for parameters of the analog input/output modules
parameter sets for signal modules a-32 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 measuring methods and measuring ranges the table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the analog input/output modules and their codes. you must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to figure a-13). table a-22 codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input/output modules measuring method code measuring range code deactivated 2#0000 deactivated 2#0000 voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 v 2#1000 resistance, four-conductor connection 2#0100 10 k
b-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostics data of signal modules in this appendix section contents page b.1 evaluating diagnostic data of the signal modules in the user program b-1 b.2 structure and content of diagnostic data bytes 0 to 7 b-2 b.3 channel-specific diagnostic data from byte 7 b-5 b.4 diagnostic data of the sm 338; pos-input b-7 b.1 evaluating diagnostic data of the signal modules in the user program in this appendix this appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data. you must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostics data of the signal module in the step 7 user program. diagnostic data are contained in data records the diagnostic data of a module can be up to 16 bytes long and are contained in data records 0 and 1: step 7 manuals. b
diagnostics data of signal modules b-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 b.2 structure and content of diagnostic data bytes 0 to 7 the structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are described below. the following general rule applies: when an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to ? 1 ? . bytes 0 and 1 byte 0 76 0 module problem internal malfunction external malfunction channel error present external auxiliary supply missing front connector missing module not parameterized. incorrect parameter in the module 54321 byte 1 76 0 channel information available user information available 54321 module type (see table b-1) 0 0 figure b-1 bytes 0 and 1 of the diagnostic data module types the following table contains the ids of the module classes (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1). table b-1 codes of the module types code module type 0101 analog module 0110 cpu 1000 function module 1100 cp 1111 digital module
diagnostics data of signal modules b-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 bytes 2 and 3 byte 2 76 0 memory module or measuring range module (for analog modules) incorrect or missing communication fault operating status 0: run 1: stop cycle time-out module-internal supply voltage failure battery empty complete backup supply failure 54321 0 byte 3 76 0 rack failure processor failure eprom error ram error adc/dac error fuse blown hardware interrupt lost 54321 0 figure b-2 bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostics data
diagnostics data of signal modules b-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 bytes 4 to 7 byte 4 76 0 54321 byte 5 70 further channel type available? 0: no 1: yes channel type b#16#70: digital input b#16#71: analog input b#16#72: digital output b#16#73: analog output number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel byte 6 70 number of channels of the same type in one module byte 7 76 0 channel error channel 0 / channel group 0 channel error channel 1 / channel group 1 channel error channel 6 / channel group 6 channel error channel 7 / channel group 7 54321 ... ... ... ... ... figure b-3 bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostics data
diagnostics data of signal modules b-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 b.3 channel-specific diagnostic data from byte 8 from byte 8 up to byte 15, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data. the figures below show the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel or a channel group of the specific module. the following general rule applies: when an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to ? 1 ? . you will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called ? diagnostics of the modules ? . digital input channel of the sm 321; di 16
diagnostics data of signal modules b-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog input channel of the sm 331 modules with diagnostics capability 76 0 configuring/parameter assignment error common mode error wire break underflow overflow 54321 short-circuit to l+ short-circuit to m reference channel error figure b-6 diagnostic byte for an analog input channel of a sm 331 with diagnostics capability analog output channel of the sm 332 modules with diagnostics capability 76 0 configuring/parameter assignment error short-circuit to m wire break external auxiliary supply missing 54321 0 0 common mode error short-circuit to l+ figure b-7 diagnostic byte for an analog output channel of a sm 332 with diagnostics capability
diagnostics data of signal modules b-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 b.4 diagnostic data of the sm 338; pos-input the structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for position detection module sm 338; pos-input are described below. the following general rule applies: when an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to ? 1 ? . section 5.4 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies. bytes 0 and 1 byte 0 76 0 module problem internal malfunction external malfunction channel error present module not parameterized incorrect parameter in the module 54321 byte 1 76 0 channel information available 54321 module class 05 h 0 0 00 0 figure b-8 bytes 0 and 1 of the diagnostic data for the sm 338; pos-input
diagnostics data of signal modules b-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 bytes 2 to 7 byte 2 76 0 cycle time-out 54321 0 byte 3 76 0 54321 byte 4 76 0 54321 byte 5 70 channel type 79 h : sm pos-input number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long byte 6 70 number of channels of the same type in one module: 3 channels byte 7 76 0 channel error, channel 0 channel error, channel 1 channel error, channel 2 54321 not relevant 0 00 000 figure b-9 bytes 2 and 7 of the diagnostic data for the sm 338; pos-input bytes 8 to 10 from byte 8 up to byte 10, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data. the figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the sm 338; pos-input. 76 0 54321 0 0 configuration/parameterization error (internal channel error) encoder error (external channel error) 00 00 figure b-10 diagnostic byte for a channel of the sm 338; pos-input
c-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 dimension drawings introduction in this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings for the most important components of an s7-300. the specifications in these dimension drawings are required for dimensioning the s7-300 configuration. the dimensions of an s7-300 configuration must be taken into account when installing an s7-300 in cabinets, switchgear rooms, etc. this appendix does not contain any dimension drawings of the cpus of the s7-300 or m7-300 or of the im 153-1. these dimension drawings are contained in the relevant manuals. contents in this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings of the following s7-300 components. section contents page c.1 dimension drawings of the rails c-2 c.2 dimension drawings of the power supply modules c-9 c.3 dimension drawings of the interface modules c-14 c.4 dimension drawings of the signal modules c-14 c.5 dimension drawings for accessories c-17 c
dimension drawings c-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 c.1 dimension drawings of the rails 483 mm standard rail figure c-1 shows the dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail. 15 19 35 24 8.7 465.2 163.9 155 11 482.6 7 figure c-1 dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail
dimension drawings c-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 530 mm standard rail figure c-2 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm standard rail. 15 19 35 24 15 20
dimension drawings c-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 2000 mm standard rail figure c-4 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm standard rail. 15 19 35 24 2000 figure c-4 dimension drawing of the 2000 mm standard rail 160 mm rail figure c-5 shows the dimension drawing of the 160 mm rail. 140 10 57.2 32.5 160 15 6 122 7 10 m6 figure c-5 dimension drawing of the rail with 160 mm standard width
dimension drawings c-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 482.6 mm rail figure c-6 shows the dimension drawing of the 482.6 mm rail. 8.3 15 6 466 57.2 32.5 482.6 122 7 10 m6 figure c-6 dimension drawing of the rail with 482.6 mm standard width 530 mm rail figure c-7 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm rail. 500 15 57.2 32.5 530 15 6 122 7 10 m6 figure c-7 dimension drawing of the rail with 530 mm standard width
dimension drawings c-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 830 mm rail figure c-8 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm rail. 800 15 57.2 32.5 830 15 6 122 7 10 m6 figure c-8 dimension drawing of the rail with 830 mm standard width 2000 mm rail figure c-9 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm rail. 2000 15 6 122 figure c-9 dimension drawing of the 2000 mm rail
dimension drawings c-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 rail for ? insert and remove ? function figure c-10 shows the dimension drawing of the rail for the ? insert and remove ? function with active bus module, s7-300 module and explosion-proof partition. the rail is 482.6 mm or 530 mm long. 152 166 122 125 155 explosion-proof partition s7-300 module active bus module rail for the ? insert and remove ? function 59 figure c-10 complete dimension drawing of a rail for ? insert and remove ? function with active bus module, s7-300 module and explosion-proof partition
dimension drawings c-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 bus modules (expansion buses) figure c-11 shows the dimension drawing of the active bus module for the ? insert and remove ? function. bus modules bm ps/im (...7ha) bm im/im (...7hd) bm 2
dimension drawings c-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 c.2 dimension drawings of the power supply modules ps 307; 2 a figure c-12 shows the dimension drawing of the ps 307; 2 a power supply module. 50 120 127.5 125 figure c-12 power supply module ps 307; 2 a
dimension drawings c-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ps 307; 5a figure c-13 shows the dimension drawing of the ps 307; 5 a power supply module. 120 127.5 125 80 figure c-13 power supply module ps 307; 5 a
dimension drawings c-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ps 307; 10 a figure c-14 shows the dimension drawing of the ps 307; 10 a power supply module. 120 127.5 200 125 figure c-14 power supply module ps 307; 10 a
dimension drawings c-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ps 307; 5 a with cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp figures c-15 and c-16 show the dimension drawings of the configuration of a power supply module ps 307; 5 a with the cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp. observe the dimensions that result from the use of the power connector for wiring the ps 307; 5 a with the cpu. 27 68 132 figure c-15 dimension drawing of the power supply module ps 307; 5 a with cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp. front view
dimension drawings c-13 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ps 307; 5 a with cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp figure c-16 shows the dimension drawing of the power supply module ps 307; 5 a with the cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp in the side view. 125 13 130 120 6 figure c-16 dimension drawing of the power supply module ps 307; 5 a with cpus 313/314/315/315-2 dp. side view
dimension drawings c-14 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 c.3 dimension drawings of the interface modules im 360 figure c-17 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module im 360. 125 120 40 figure c-17 interface module im 360
dimension drawings c-15 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 im 361 figure c-18 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module im 361. 125 120 80 figure c-18 interface module im 361
dimension drawings c-16 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 im 365 figure c-19 shows the dimension drawing of interface module im 365. 125 120 125 120 40 9 figure c-19 interface module im 365
dimension drawings c-17 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 c.4 dimension drawings of the signal modules signal module figure c-20 shows the dimension drawing of the signal module. a signal module might look slightly different than the example below. the dimensions however are always the same. 125 120 40 130 figure c-20 signal module
dimension drawings c-18 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 c.5 dimension drawings for accessories shield connecting element figure c-21 shows the dimension drawing of the shield connecting element in connection with two signal modules. 190 80 40 120 figure c-21 2 signal modules with shield connecting element
dimension drawings c-19 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 simatic top connect, 3-tier figure c-22 shows the dimension drawing of the 3-tier simatic top connect. 70 60 40.5 35.5 35 figure c-22 simatic top connect, 3-tier simatic top connect, 2-tier figure c-23 shows the dimension drawing of the 2-tier simatic top connect. 70 60 40.5 35.5 35 figure c-23 simatic top connect, 2-tier
dimension drawings c-20 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 simatic top connect, 1-tier figure c-24 shows the dimension drawing of the 1-tier simatic top connect. 55 52 40.5 35.5 35 figure c-24 simatic top connect, 1-tier rs 485 repeater on standard rail figure c-25 shows the dimension drawing of the rs 485 repeater on the standard rail. 73 125 128 45 figure c-25 rs 485 repeater on standard rail
dimension drawings c-21 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 rs 485 repeater on s7-300 rail figure c-26 shows the dimension drawing of the rs 485 repeater on the s7-300 rail. 125 70 45 figure c-26 rs 485 repeater on s7-300 rail
dimension drawings c-22 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01
d-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 spare parts and accessories for s7-300 modules spare parts table d-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for s7-300 programmable controllers. table d-1 accessories and spare parts s7-300 parts order number bus connector 6es7 390-0aa00-0aa0 power connector between power supply unit and cpu 6es7 390-7ba00-0aa0 labeling strip (qty 10)
spare parts and accessories for s7-300 modules d-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 table d-1 accessories and spare parts, continued s7-300 parts order number simatic top connect, 3-tier, with
e-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) introduction in this appendix, we explain ? electrostatic sensitive devices ?
guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) e-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 e.1 what is esd? definition all electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ics or components. due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge. these e lectrostatic s ensitive d evices are commonly referred to by the abbreviation esd . electrostatic sensitive devices are labelled with the following symbol: ! caution electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. these voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged. in most cases, the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation.
guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) e-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 e.2 electrostatic charging of persons charging every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be charged electrostatically. figure e-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure. these values are in conformity with the specifications of iec 801-2. voltage in kv 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (kv) 510 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 relative air humidity in % 1 3 1 synthetic material 2 wool 3 antistatic material, for example, wood or concrete 2 figure e-1 electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person
guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) e-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 e.3 general protective measures against electrostatic discharge damage ensure sufficient grounding make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. you thus avoid electrostatic charging. avoid direct contact you should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable (for example, during maintenance work). hold modules without touching the pins of components or printed conductors. in this way, the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices. if you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. use grounded measuring devices only.
f-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 list of abbreviations abbreviation explanation ac alternating current adc analog-to digital converter ai aanalog input ao analog output comp compensating terminal cp communications processor cpu central processing unit of a plc dac digital-to-analog converter db data block dc direct current di digital input do digital output emc electromagnetic compatibility eprom erasable programmable read-only memory es encoder supply esd electrostatic sensitive devices ews apply substitute value fb function block fc function feprom flash erasable programmable read only memory foc fiber-optic cable i c constant-current lead l+ terminal for 24 vdc supply voltage lwh hold last valid value m ground terminal m+ measuring lead (positive) m ? measuring lead (negative) m ana reference potential of the analog measuring circuit mpi multipoint interface f
list of abbreviations f-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ob organization block op operator panel os operator system piq process-image output table pii process-image input table plc programmable logic controller programming device programming device ps power supply q i analog output current q v analog output voltage ram random access memory r l load impedance s + detector lead (positive) s ? detector lead (negative) sf ? group error ? error led sfb system function block sfc system function sm signal module ssi synchronous serial interface td text display u cm common mode voltage u iso potential difference between m ana and local ground vz sign
glossary-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 glossary address an address denotes a specific operand or address area; examples of this are: input i 12.1; memory word mw 25; data block db 3. aggregate current sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module. backplane bus the backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to communi- cate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require. the inter- connection of the modules is established by the bus connector. backup battery the backup battery ensures that the
glossary glossary-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 common mode voltage a voltage that is common to all inputs/outputs of a group and is measured between this group and any reference point (usually to ground). communication processor programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking, point-to-point connection. comparison point when using thermocouples on analog input modules: point of known tempera- ture (for example, step 7 user program is processed, starting with the first instruction in ob1. configure select and put together different components on a programmable logic controller and install the requisite software (for example, operating system on m7 automation computer) and adapt to the specific use (for example, by assigning parameters to the modules). cp
glossary glossary-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 default setting the default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other value is used. diagnostics generic term for step 7 (plc -> module state) from the diagnostic buffer. diagnostic data all the diagnostics events that occurred are collected in the cpu and entered in the
glossary glossary-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 eprom erasable programmable read-only memory equipotential bonding electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor), which brings the bodies of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approxi- mately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages bet- ween these bodies. external load memory step 7 for position detection module sm 338; pos-input. the freeze function is a control command for freezing current encoder values of the sm 338 to the instantaneous value. gray code data format of ? reference ground ? is frequently used to describe such cir- cumstances. ground the ground is the total number of all interconnected inactive parts of an item which cannot assume a hazardous voltage in the event of a fault. ground, to to ground means connect an electrically conductive part by means of a groun- ding system to the grounding electrode (one or more conductive parts having a very good contact to ground).
glossary glossary-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 hardware interrupt a hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a certain event in the process (overshooting or undershooting of a limit value; a module has completed the cyclic conversion of its channels). the hardware interrupt is reported to the cpu. in accordance with the priority of this interrupt, the step 7 for digital input modules. the input delay is used to sup- press injected interference. interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay are suppressed. the set input delay is subject to a tolerance, which can be taken from the techni- cal specifications of the module. a high input delay suppresses long interfering pulses, whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones. the permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the en- coder and the module. for example, a high input delay has to be set for long unshielded supply conductors to the encoder (longer than 100m). integration time parameter in step 7 for analog input modules. the integration time is the inverse value of the step 7 for analog input modules. the frequency of the ac net- work can interfere with the measured value, especially with measurements in low voltage ranges and with thermocouples. this parameter is used by the user to specify the prevailing line frequency on his system. interrupt the simatic s7 is familiar with 28 different run-time level, which govern running of the user program. these run-time levels include interrupts such as hardware interrupts, among other things. when an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program the reaction he wants (for example, in an fb).
glossary glossary-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 interrupt, diagnostic step 7 user program. by contrast, a data block only contains data. there are the following logic blocks: organization blocks (obs), function blocks (fbs), functions (fcs), system function block (sfbs), system functions (sfcs). m7 owing to its standardized at computer architecture, automation computers m7-300 and m7-400 represent a freely programmable expansion of the simatic automation platform. the hardware configuration is similar to that of a s7-300 or s7-400. the user programs for the simatic m7 can also be programmed in a high-level language, such as c, or graphically. measuring range module measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adapta- tion to different measuring ranges. memory card pluggable load memory. memory cards are credit-card size storage media for cpus and cps. they are implemented as step 7 for position detection module sm 338; pos-input. the monoflop time is the time interval between 2 ssi message frames (
glossary glossary-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 module filtering mode by operating mode we mean: 1. the selection of an operating mode of the cpu using the mode switch or the pg 2. the type of program execution in the cpu 3. a parameter in step 7 for analog input modules non-isolated in the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are electrically connected. normalizing parameter in step 7 for position detection module sm 338; pos-input. nor- malizing right justifies the encoder value of the step 7 .
glossary glossary-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 plc
glossary glossary-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 ram a ram (random access memory) is a semiconductor memory with random access. reaction to open thermocouple parameter in step 7 for analog input modules when using thermocouples. this parameter defines whether ? overflow ? (7fff h ) or ? underflow ? (8000 h ) is output by the module in the event of an open thermocouple. repeater equipment for the amplification of bus signals and connection of
glossary glossary-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 sdb step 7 for analog input modules. the measured values are smoo- thed by digital filtering. for specific modules it is possible to choose between no, low, medium and high smoothing. the higher the smoothing, the greater is the time constant of the digital filter. startup the startup mode is transversed during the transition from stop mode to run mode. startup can be triggered by the
glossary glossary-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 step 7 parameter assignment and programming software for assigning parameters to and the creation of user programs for simatic s7 controllers. substitute value substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal out- put modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process va- lue when signal input modules have failed. the substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in step 7 (old value retained, substitute value 0 or 1). they are values which the output(s) have to output in the event of a cpu stop. system data block sdbs (system data blocks) are data areas on the central processing unit which contain system settings and module parameters. the system data blocks are created and modified in step 7 . system diagnostics system diagnostics is the detection, analysis and reporting of errors that occur within the programmable logic controller. examples of such errors are: program errors or failures on modules. system errors can be indicated with led displays or in step 7 . system function a system function (sfc) is a function that is integrated in the operating system of the cpu a function that can be triggered in the step 7 user program, if necessary. temperature coefficient parameter in step 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures with a resistance thermometer (rtd). the temperature coefficient you select depends on the resistance thermometer being used (to din standard). transmission rate parameter in step 7 for position detection module sm 338; pos-input: rate of data transmission (bit/s)
glossary glossary-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 two-conductor/three-conductor/four-conductor connection method of connection to the module ? for example, of resistance thermometers/resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of loads at the voltage output of an analog output module. two-wire transmitter/four-wire transmitter kind of transmitter (two-wire transmitter: supply (via terminals of the analog input module; four-wire transmitter: supply via separate terminals of the transmitter) ungrounded without galvanic connection to ground user program the user program contains all the statements, tags and data for signal processing used to control a system or a process. it is assigned to a programmable module (cpu, fm, for example) and can be structured in smaller units (blocks). varistor voltage-dependent resistor wire break parameter in step 7 . a wire break test is used for monitoring the connection from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator. with wire break, the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized input/output.
index-1 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 index a accessories, d-1 active bus module, dimension drawing, c-8 actuator connection, to analog output module, 4-62 address, glossary-1 addressing, sm 338; pos-input, 5-15 aggregate current, glossary-1 ambient conditions, mechanical, 1-7, 1-13 analog functions, step 7 blocks, 4-1 analog input module causes of errors and remedies, 4-70 common-mode error, 4-70 configuring error, 4-70 connecting resistance thermometers, 4-51 connecting resistors, 4-51 connecting sensor, 4-43 connecting thermocouple, 4-55 diagnostic message in measured value, 4-68 diagnostic messages, 4-69 diagnostics, 4-39 diagnostics interrupt, 4-39 group diagnostics, 4-39 interference frequency suppression, 4-41, a-9 isolated, 4-43 limit value, 4-39 load voltage missing, 4-70 measurement, 4-40 measuring method, 4-40 measuring methods and measuring ranges, a-9 measuring range, 4-40 module filtering mode, 4-40 non-isolated, 4-43 overflow, 4-70 parameter assignment error, 4-70 parameters, 4-39, a-7 potential difference, 4-43, 4-44 reaction with open thermocouple, 4-40 sm 331; ai 2 x 12 bit, 4-94 sm 331; ai 8 x 12 bit, 4-74 sm 331; ai 8 x 16 bit, 4-85 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, 4-105 sm 331; ai 8 x tc, 4-116 smoothing of analog input values, 4-41 structure of data record 1, a-8 temperature coefficient, 4-40 temperature unit, 4-40 underflow, 4-70 wire break, 4-70, 4-71 wire-break check, 4-39 analog input modules, sm 331, channel-specific diagnostic data, b-6 analog input/module, structure of data record 1, a-31 analog input/output module integration time, 4-42 measurement, 4-42 measuring method, 4-42 measuring range, 4-42 output range, 4-42 output type, 4-42 parameters, 4-42, a-30 sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 x 12 bit, 4-151 sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 x 8/8 bit, 4-145
index index-2 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 analog module assigning parameters, 4-38 behavior, 4-30 determination of measuring error/output error, 4-33 diagnostics, 4-68 dimension drawing, c-17 group error led, 4-68 interrupts, 4-71 sequence of steps for commissioning, 4-7 sf led, 4-68 supply voltage failure, 4-31 analog output channel, conversion time, 4-36 analog output module causes of errors and remedies, 4-71 connecting loads and actuators, 4-62 connecting loads to current output, 4-66 connecting loads to voltage output, 4-63 diagnostic messages, 4-69 diagnostics, 4-41 diagnostics interrupt, 4-41 group diagnostics, 4-41 isolated, 4-62 load voltage missing, 4-71 m short-circuit, 4-71 non-isolated, 4-62 output methods and output ranges, a-29 output range, 4-41 output type, 4-41 parameter assignment error, 4-71 parameters, 4-41 response time, 4-37 response with cpu-stop, 4-41 setting substitute values, a-29 settling time, 4-37 sm 332; ao 2 x 12 bit, 4-134 sm 332; ao 4 x 12 bit, 4-128 sm 332; ao 4 x 16 bit, 4-140 structure of data record 1, a-28 analog output modules, parameters, a-27 analog output modules, sm 332, channel-specific diagnostic data, b-6 analog value conversion, 4-8 sign, 4-8 analog value representation, 4-8 binary representation of input ranges, 4-11 binary representation of output ranges, 4-23 for current measuring ranges, 4-14 ? 4-16 for current output ranges, 4-26 ? 4-29 for resistance-type transmitters, 4-15 for voltage measuring ranges, 4-12 ? 4-14 for voltage output ranges, 4-25 ? 4-28 analog-to-digital conversion, 4-34 approvals, iv, 1-2 audience, for manual, iii automation and drives, viii auxiliary voltage missing, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 b backplane bus, glossary-1 backup battery, 1-6, glossary-1 shipping and storage conditions, 1-6 basic error limit, 4-33 battery. siehe backup battery behavior, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-21 binary code, glossary-1 bus segment, glossary-1 bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data, b-2 of diagnostic data for sm 338; pos-input, b-7 bytes 2 and 3, of diagnostic data, b-3 bytes 2 to 7, of diagnostic data for sm 338; pos-input, b-8 bytes 4 to 7, of diagnostic data, b-4 bytes 8 to 10, of diagnostic data for sm 338; pos-input, b-8 c cables, for analog signals, 4-43, 4-62 causes of error and remedial action, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-53 causes of error and remedial measures, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23
index index-3 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 causes of errors and remedies analog input module, 4-70 analog output module, 4-71 ce mark, 1-2 changes, in manual, iv channel error, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 channel information present, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 channel-specific diagnostics, b-5 climatic conditions, 1-8 code type, sm 338; pos-input, 5-11 commissioning analog modules, sequence of steps, 4-7 commissioning digital modules, sequence of steps, 3-7 common mode voltage, glossary-2 common-mode error, analog input module, 4-70 communication processor, glossary-2 comparison point, 4-59, glossary-2 compensating box, 4-57 connecting, 4-58 compensation external, 4-57 internal, 4-56, 4-58 complete restart, glossary-2 configuration error, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 configure, glossary-2 configuring error, analog input module, 4-70 conversion time analog input channels, 4-34 analog output channel, 4-36 converting, analog values, 4-8 courses, vii cp, glossary-2 cpu, glossary-2 csa, approval, 1-3 current sensors, connecting, 4-49 d data record, for diagnostic data, b-1 data record 1 analog input module configuration, a-8 analog output module configuration, a-28 digital input module configuration, a-4 digital output module configuration, a-6 structure for sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-12 structure for sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-20 structure of analog input/output module, a-31 data record 128 structure for sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-13 structure for sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-21 data records, for parameters, a-2 default setting, glossary-3 degree of protection, 1-9 ip 20, 1-9 diagnostic buffer, glossary-3 diagnostic data, glossary-3 bytes 0 and 1, b-2 bytes 2 and 3, b-3 bytes 4 to 7, b-4 channel-specific, b-5 channel-specific, for analog input modules of sm 331, b-6 channel-specific, for analog output modules of sm 332, b-6 channel-specific, for sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, b-5 channel-specific, for sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0,5 a, b-5 channel-specific, for sm 338; pos-input, b-8 data record, b-1 sm 338; pos-input, b-7 diagnostic data for sm 338; pos-input, bytes 0 and 1, b-7 diagnostic data of sm 338; pos-input bytes 2 to 7, b-8 bytes 8 to 10, b-8 diagnostic interrupt of analog modules, 4-72 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-19, 3-24 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50, 3-54 sm 338; pos-input, 5-20 diagnostic interrupt enable, sm 338; pos-input, 5-11 diagnostic messages, 3-9, 4-68, 5-17 of analog input modules, 4-69 of analog output modules, 4-69 reading out, 3-9, 4-68, 5-17 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-52 diagnostics analog input module, 4-39 analog output module, 4-41 of analog modules, 4-68 of digital modules, 3-9 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-19, 3-21 sm 338; pos-input, 5-17, 5-18 system, glossary-11 diagnostics entry, 4-31
index index-4 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 diagnostics interrupt analog input module, 4-39 analog output module, 4-41 digital input module sm 321; di 16 x 120 vac, 3-30 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-13 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc; source input, 3-26 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts, 3-16 sm 321; di 16 x 48-125 vdc, 3-28 sm 321; di 32 x 120 vac, 3-35 sm 321; di 32 x 24 vdc, 3-10 sm 321; di 8 x 120/230 vac, 3-32 structure of data record 1, a-4 digital input modules, parameters, a-3 digital input/output module sm 323; di 16/do 16 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-82 sm 323; di 8/do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-86 digital module assigning parameters, 3-8 diagnostics, 3-9 dimension drawing, c-17 group error led, 3-9 sequence of steps for commissioning, 3-7 sf led, 3-9 digital output module parameters, a-5 sm 322; do 16 x 120 vac/1 a, 3-58 sm 322; do 16 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-40 sm 322; do 32 x 120 vac/1.0 a, 3-64 sm 322; do 32 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-37 sm 322; do 8 x 120/230 vac/2 a, 3-61 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vac/2 a, 3-43 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a with diagnostic interrupt, 3-46 sm 322; do 8 x 48-125 vdc/1.5 a, 3-55 structure of data record 1, a-6 dimension drawing, active bus module, c-8 dimension drawings, c-1 analog module, c-17 digital module, c-17 im 361, c-14 interface module, c-14 power supply module ps 307, c-9 ps 307, c-9 rail, c-2 rs 485 repeater, c-20 shield connecting element, c-18 signal module, c-17 simatic top connect, c-19 direct access, glossary-3 documentation package, v dummy module, dm 370, 5-5 e edge, glossary-3 electromagnetic compatibility, 1-4 emc directive, 1-2 encoder absolute, glossary-3 encoder absolute (ssi), sm 338; pos-input, 5-11 encoder error, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 environmental conditions, 1-7 extended, 1-11 outdoor modules, 1-13 eprom, glossary-4 eprom error sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-53 equipotential bonding, glossary-4 error, of an analog module, 4-33 error causes and troubleshooting, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 extended environmental conditions, 1-11 external auxiliary voltage missing, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 f feprom, glossary-4 fm, approval, 1-3 four-conductor connection, glossary-12 four-wire connection, 4-52 four-wire transmitter, glossary-12 four-wire transmitters, 4-51 freeze, glossary-4 freeze function, sm 338; pos-input, 5-11, 5-14 further support, vii fuse blown sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-53 g gray code, glossary-4 ground, glossary-4 grounded operation, rs 485 repeater, 7-4
index index-5 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 group diagnostics analog input module, 4-39 analog output module, 4-41 group error led analog module, 4-68 digital module, 3-9 sm 338; pos-input, 5-17 h hardware interrupt, glossary-5 end of scan cycle, 4-73 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-19, 3-25 when limit exceeded, 4-72 hardware interrupt lost, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23, 3-25 hold last value, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50 i iec 61131, 1-2 im 360 dimension drawing, c-14 interface module, 6-3 im 361, interface module, 6-5 im 365 dimension drawing, c-16 interface module, 6-7 input delay, glossary-5 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-19 insulation test, 1-9 integration time, glossary-5 analog input/output module, 4-42 interface module, 6-1 dimension drawing, c-14 im 360, 6-3 im 361, 6-5 im 365, 6-7 interference pulse-shaped, 1-4 sinusoidal, 1-5 interference frequency suppression, glossary-5 analog input module, 4-41, a-9 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-16 sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-24 internal auxiliary voltage missing, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 internal error, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 interrupt, glossary-5 interrupt-triggering channels, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-25 interrupts enabling, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72, 5-20 of analog modules, 4-71 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-24 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-54 sm 338; pos-input, 5-20 ip 20, 1-9 isolated sensors, connecting, 4-44 l lack of encoder supply, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 limit value, analog input module, 4-39 load connection, to analog output module, 4-62 load connection to current output, to analog output module, 4-66 load connection to voltage output, to analog output module, 4-63 load voltage missing analog input module, 4-70 analog output module, 4-71 logic block, glossary-6 lwh, glossary-5 m m short-circuit, analog output module, 4-71 m7, glossary-6 m7-300, parameter assignment in user program, a-1 manual, purpose, iii manual changes, iv manual package, v measurement analog input module, 4-40 analog input/output module, 4-42 measuring method analog input channels, 4-27 analog input module, 4-40, a-9 analog input/output module, 4-42 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-16 sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-25
index index-6 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 measuring range analog input channels, 4-27 analog input module, 4-40, a-9 analog input/output module, 4-42 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-16 sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-25 measuring range module, 4-27 replugging, 4-28 memory card, glossary-6 module classes, id, b-2 module filtering mode, glossary-7 analog input module, 4-40 module malfunction, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 module overview, 4-4 digital modules, 3-4 other signal modules, 5-2 simatic top connect/...tpa, 8-2 modules, shipping and storage conditions, 1-6 monoflop time, glossary-6 sm 338; pos-input, 5-11, 5-12 mpi, glossary-6 n navigation, through the manual, vi no external auxiliary voltage, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-53 no internal auxiliary voltage, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-53 no load voltage l+, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50, 3-53 non-isolated, glossary-7 non-isolated sensors, 4-46 connecting, 4-46 normalizing, glossary-7 sm 338; pos-input, 5-11, 5-13 o ob, glossary-7 ob 40, 3-25, 4-72 start information, 4-73 ob 82, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72 online services, ix operating conditions, 1-7 operating mode of cpu, 4-30 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-16 sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-24 operating system, glossary-7 operational limit, 4-33 optically isolated, glossary-7 order number 6es7 305-1ba80-0aa0, 2-2 6es7 307-1ba00-0aa0, 2-6 6es7 307-1ea00-0aa0, 2-10 6es7 307-1ea80-0aa0, 2-10 6es7 307-1ka00-0aa0, 2-15 6es7 331-7kb02-0ab0, 4-94 6es7 331-7kb82-0ab0, 4-94 6es7 331-7kf02-0ab0, 4-74 6es7 331-7nf00-0ab0, 4-85 6es7 331-7pf00-0ab0, 4-105 6es7 331-7pf10-0ab0, 4-116 6es7 332-5hb01-0ab0, 4-134 6es7 332-5hd01-0ab0, 4-128 6es7 332-7nd00-0ab0, 4-140 6es7 334-0ce01-0aa0, 4-145 6es7 334-0ke00-0ab0, 4-151 6es7 338-4bc00-0ab0, 5-7 6es7 360-3aa01-0aa0, 6-3 6es7 361 3ca01-0aa0, 6-5 6es7 365-0ba01-0aa0, 6-7 6es7 370-0aa01-0aa0, 5-5 6es7 374-2xh01-0aa0, 5-3 6es7 972-0aa01-0xa0, 7-2
index index-7 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 order number 6es7 321-1bh02-0aa0, 3-13 6es7 321-1bh50-0aa0, 3-26 6es7 321-1bh82-0aa0, 3-13 6es7 321-1bl00-0aa0, 3-10 6es7 321-1bl80-0aa0, 3-10 6es7 321-1ch80-0aa0, 3-28 6es7 321-1eh01-0aa0, 3-30 6es7 321-1el00-0aa0, 3-35 6es7 321-1ff01-0aa0, 3-32 6es7 321-1ff81-0aa0, 3-32 6es7 321-7bh00-0ab0, 3-16 6es7 321-7bh80-0ab0, 3-16 6es7 322-1bf01-0aa0, 3-43 6es7 322-1bh01-0aa0, 3-40 6es7 322-1bh81-0aa0, 3-40 6es7 322-1bl00-0aa0, 3-37 6es7 322-1cf80-0aa0, 3-55 6es7 322-1eh01-0aa0, 3-58 6es7 322-1el00-0aa0, 3-64 6es7 322-1ff01-0aa0, 3-61 6es7 322-1ff81-0aa0, 3-61 6es7 322-1hf01-0aa0, 3-71 6es7 322-1hf10-0aa0, 3-74 6es7 322-1hf20-0aa0, 3-78 6es7 322-1hf80-0aa0, 3-74 6es7 322-1hh00-0aa0, 3-68 6es7 322-8bf00-0ab0, 3-46 6es7 322-8bf80-0aa0, 3-46 6es7 323-1bl00-0aa0, 3-82 6es7 323-8bh01-0aa0, 3-86 6es7 323-8bh81-0aa0, 3-86 organization block (ob), glossary-7 outdoor modules, 1-11 output analog values, step 7 blocks, 4-1 output method, analog output module, a-29 output range analog input/output module, 4-42 analog output module, 4-41, a-29 output type analog input/output module, 4-42 analog output module, 4-41 overflow, analog input module, 4-70 p parameter assignment for analog modules, 4-38 for digital modules, 3-8 in user program, a-1 parameter assignment error analog input module, 4-70 analog output module, 4-71 parameterization error, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 parameterization missing, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 parameters, glossary-7 analog input module, 4-39, a-7 analog input/output module, 4-42, a-30 analog output module, 4-41 analog output modules, a-27 data records, a-2 digital input modules, a-3 digital output module, a-5 dynamic, 3-8, 4-38 modifying in user program, 3-8, 4-38 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-19 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-11 sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-19 sm 338; pos-input, 5-11 static, 3-8, 4-38 parameters, wrong sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 parm_mod, sfc 57, a-2 pin assignment, rs 485 repeater, 7-6 plc, glossary-8 pos input module sm 338, 5-7 position detection module, sm 338; pos-input, 5-7 potential difference, with analog input modules, 4-43, 4-44 power supply module, 2-1 dimension drawing, c-9 ps 305 2 a, 2-2 ps 307 10 a, 2-15 ps 307 2 a, 2-6 ps 307 5 a, 2-10 process image, glossary-8 product status, glossary-8 profibus-dp, glossary-8 programmable logic control (plc), glossary-8 programmable logic controller, glossary-8 programming device (pg), glossary-8 protection class, 1-9 ps 307, dimension drawing, c-9 pulse edge, 3-19 pulse-shaped interference, 1-4
index index-8 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 r radio interference, emission of, 1-5 rail for the ? insert and remove ? function, dimension drawing, c-7 rails, dimension drawing, c-2 ram, glossary-9 ram error sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-53 rated voltages, 1-10 reaction to open thermocouple, sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-26 read analog values, step 7 blocks, 4-1 reference junction temperature with thermocouples, compensating, 4-56 reference potential, glossary-9 relay output module sm 322; do 16 x rel. 120 vac, 3-68 sm 322; do 8 x rel. 230 vac, 3-71 sm 322; do 8 x rel. 230 vac/5 a, 3-74, 3-78 repeater, glossary-9 siehe auch rs 485 repeater resistance thermometer connection, to analog input module, 4-51 resistor connection, to analog input module, 4-51 resolution, 4-8, glossary-9 response time, 4-37 response with cpu-stop, analog output module, 4-41 retentivity, glossary-9 rs 485 repeater, 7-1 appearance, 7-3 application, 7-2 definition, 7-2 dimension drawing, c-20 grounded, 7-4 grounded operation, 7-4 rules, 7-2 ungrounded, 7-4 ungrounded operation, 7-4 s scan time, glossary-9 analog input channels, 4-34 analog output channels, 4-36 screw-type terminals, simatic top connect/...tpa, 8-10 sdb, glossary-11 sensor connection, to analog input module, 4-43 sensors, non-isolated, 4-46 service & support, viii settling time, 4-37 sf led analog module, 4-68 digital module, 3-9 sm 338; pos-input, 5-17 sfc, glossary-10, glossary-11 sfc 51, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72 sfc 55 wr_parm, a-2 sfc 56 wr_dparm, a-2 sfc 57 parm_mod, a-2 sfc 59, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72 shield connecting element, dimension drawing, c-18 short-circuit, glossary-10 short-circuit to l+, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50, 3-53 short-circuit to m, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50, 3-53 sign, analog value, 4-8 signal module, glossary-10 dimension drawing, c-17 simatic outdoor modules, 1-11 simatic top connect components, 8-12 connection for 2a modules, 8-18 dimension drawing, c-19 one-conductor connection, 8-14 selecting components, 8-13 three-conductor connection, 8-16 wiring 32-channels digital modules, 8-8
index index-9 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 simatic top connect tpa component selection, 8-20 connection example, 8-24 multiplier terminal, 8-21 shield connection, 8-23 terminal allocation to analog module, 8-22 terminal assignment, 8-21 simatic top connect/...tpa advantages of using, 8-3 components, 8-3 configuration, 8-2 connecting cable, 8-4 connectors, 8-4 mounting terminal block and connecting cable, 8-10 screw-type terminals, 8-10 spring-loaded terminals, 8-10 wiring, 8-4 wiring actuators/sensors to terminal block, 8-10 wiring rules, 8-7 wiring the front connector module, 8-6 wiring with modules..., 8-3 simulator module, sm 374; in/out 16, 5-3 sinusoidal interference, 1-5 sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc causes of error and remedial measures, 3-23 channel-specific diagnostic data, b-5 diagnostic interrupt, 3-19, 3-24 diagnostics, 3-19 eprom error, 3-23 external auxiliary voltage missing, 3-23 fuse blown, 3-23 hardware interrupt, 3-19, 3-25 hardware interrupt lost, 3-23, 3-25 input delay, 3-19 internal auxiliary voltage missing, 3-23 interrupt-triggering channels, 3-25 interrupts, 3-24 lack of encoder supply, 3-23 parameters, wrong, 3-23 ram error, 3-23 redundant encoder supply, 3-17 voltage type, 3-19 watchdog, 3-23 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a apply substitute value ? 1 ? , 3-50 causes of error and remedial action, 3-53 diagnostic interrupt, 3-50, 3-54 diagnostic messages, 3-52 eprom error, 3-53 fuse blown, 3-53 hold last value, 3-50 interrupts, 3-54 no external auxiliary voltage, 3-53 no internal auxiliary voltage, 3-53 no load voltage l+, 3-50, 3-53 parameters, 3-50 ram error, 3-53 short-circuit to l+, 3-50, 3-53 short-circuit to m, 3-50, 3-53 substitute value application, 3-50 watchdog, 3-53 wire break, 3-50, 3-53 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0,5 a, channel-specific diagnostic data, b-5 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd interference frequency suppression, a-16 operating modes, a-16 parameters, a-11 smoothing, a-18 structure of data record 1, a-12 structure of data record 128, a-13 temperature coefficient, a-18 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd x 24 bit, measuring methods and measuring ranges, a-16
index index-10 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 sm 331; ai 8 x tc interference frequency suppression, a-24 measuring methods and measuring ranges, a-25 operating modes, a-24 parameters, a-19 reaction to open thermocouple, a-26 smoothing, a-26 structure of data record 1, a-20 structure of data record 128, a-21 sm 338, pos input module, 5-7 sm 338; pos-input addressing, 5-15 auxiliary voltage missing, 5-19 causes of errors and troubleshooting, 5-19 channel error, 5-19 channel information present, 5-19 channel-specific diagnostic data, b-8 code type, 5-11 configuration error, 5-19 diagnostic data, b-7 diagnostic interrupt, 5-20 diagnostic interrupt enable, 5-11 diagnostics, 5-17 encoder absolute (ssi), 5-11 encoder error, 5-19 external error, 5-19 freeze function, 5-11, 5-14 group error led, 5-17 internal error, 5-19 interrupts, 5-20 module malfunction, 5-19 monoflop time, 5-11, 5-12 normalizing, 5-11, 5-13 parameterization error, 5-19 parameterization missing, 5-19 parameters, wrong, 5-19 sf led, 5-17 transmission rate, 5-11, 5-12 watchdog tripped, 5-19 smoothing, glossary-10 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-18 sm 331; ai 8 x tc, a-26 smoothing analog input values, 4-35 smoothing of analog input values, analog input module, 4-41 spare parts, d-1 spring-loaded terminals, simatic top connect/...tpa, 8-10 standards, iv, 1-2 startup, glossary-10 status mode, glossary-10 step 7, glossary-11 step 7 blocks, for analog functions, 4-1 substitute value, glossary-11 analog output module, a-29 substitute value ? 1 ? application, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50 substitute value application, sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50 supply voltage failure, of the analog module, 4-31 support, further, vii system data block (sdb), glossary-11 system diagnostics, glossary-11 system function (sfc), glossary-11 t technical specifications attributes, vi rs 485 repeater, 7-6 temperature coefficient, glossary-11 analog input module, 4-40 sm 331; ai 8 x rtd, a-18 temperature unit, analog input module, 4-40 test voltages, 1-9 thermo emf, 4-55 thermocouple design, 4-55 open, reaction to, glossary-9 principle of operation, 4-55 thermocouple connection, to analog input module, 4-55 three-conductor connection, glossary-12 three-wire connection, 4-53 transmission rate, glossary-11 sm 338; pos-input, 5-11, 5-12 two-conductor connection, glossary-12 two-wire connection, 4-54 two-wire transmitter, glossary-12 two-wire transmitters, 4-50 u ul, approval, 1-3 underflow, analog input module, 4-70 ungrounded operation, rs 485 repeater, 7-4 user program, glossary-12 parameter assignment in, a-1
index index-11 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01 v varistor, glossary-12 vibrations, 1-7 voltage sensors, connecting, 4-48 voltage type, sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-19 w watchdog sm 321; di 16 x 24 vdc, 3-23 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-53 watchdog tripped, sm 338; pos-input, 5-19 wire break, glossary-12 analog input module, 4-70, 4-71 sm 322; do 8 x 24 vdc/0.5 a, 3-50, 3-53 wire-break check, analog input module, 4-39 wr_dparm, sfc 56, a-2 wr_parm, sfc 55, a-2
index index-12 s7-300 and m7-300 programmable controllers module specifications a5e00105505-01

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of S7300

	To Download S7300 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .